‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‬‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬‫‪.1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ‬‫‪.2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪.3‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫‪.4‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬‫‪.5‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪.6‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪.7‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪.8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬‫‪.9‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫‪ .10‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪ .11‬ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪ .12‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬‫‪Model No. : E-M5 II‬‬‫ﺷﻛﺭًﺍ ﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷ ﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻗ ﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺄﻓﺿﻝ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻭﻋﻣﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻥ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻭﺻﻳﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﻋﺗﻳﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏ ﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣ ﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻧﻅﺭًﺍ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺏ ‪.Olympus‬‬.‫ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺑﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺧﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺭﻳﻛﺎ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬

Information for Your Safety

IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONSWhen using your photographic equipment, basic safety precautions should always befollowed, including the following:• Read and understand all instructions before using.
• Close supervision is necessary when any flash is used by or near children. Do not leave
flash unattended while in use.
• Care must be taken as burns can occur from touching hot parts.
• Do not operate if the flash has been dropped or damaged - until it has been examined byqualified service personnel.
• Let flash cool completely before putting away.
• To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not immerse this flash in water or other liquids.
• To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this flash, but take it to qualified
service personnel when service or repair work is required. Incorrect reassembly cancause electric shock when the flash is used subsequently.
• The use of an accessory attachment not recommended by the manufacturer may cause arisk of fire, electric shock, or injury to persons.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬.‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻵﺗﻳﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬‫ ﺗﺣﺫﺭ‬.‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‬.‫ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺟﻧﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬.‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬.‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ ﺳﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬.‫ﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﺭﺟﻌﻳﺔ ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ‬

$
%
v
AR 2

‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‪10 .....................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ‬‫‪12‬‬‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ‪12 .................‬‬‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ‪13 ..........................‬‬‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪14 ......................................‬‬‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪14 ..................................‬‬‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪15 ............................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪16 ...................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪17 .............................................‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪18 ...............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪19‬‬‫ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪19 ...............‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪19 ..................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻭﺽ ‪21 ..............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ‪21 ...‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪22 .......................‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪23 ................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪25 .....‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪26 ......................iAUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ‪28 ....................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ‪30 ....................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪32 ..............PHOTO STORY‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ "ﺻﻭّ ﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ"‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪34 ...........................(P‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪35 .............. (A‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ‪36 ..................(S‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪37 .......................... (M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺯﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ‬‫)‪37 ......................................(BULB‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣُﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫)ﻣُﺭﻛﺏ ﺣﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻭء( ‪38 ................‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪39 ......................................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪40 ..................(n‬‬‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬‫)‪41 ................(Movie+Photo Mode‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻛﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪41 ....‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ "‪42 ........................... "My Clips‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ "‪43 ........................."My Clips‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪/‬ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪44 ...........‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪45 ........................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪45 ....................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫)ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ(‪47 .................‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ )‪47 ....... (AE Lock‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫)ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪48 ......................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‬‫)ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪48 ................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺣﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ‪49 ........‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬‫)‪50 ........................(Super Spot AF‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪51 .......................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ ‪52 ..............................‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )‪52 ............(Color Creator‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪HDR‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ( ‪53 ...................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ(‪54 ........................................‬‬‫ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪54 ................................. ISO‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ( ‪55 .........‬‬‫‪3 AR‬‬‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫)ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‪56 ..............‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ( ‪57 ........‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪58 ...‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺟﻡ ﻋﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ )‪59 ........(Anti-Shock z‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‬‫)]♥[‪59 ..................................(Silent‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬‫)‪60 ........................(High Res Shot‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪60 ...........‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ( ‪61 .................‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ( ‪62 ...................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪63 .............‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪66 ......................‬‬‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﻸﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬‫)‪66 ......................(Button Function‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪70 ...........‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ‬‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ( ‪71 ..............................‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ( ‪71 ........................................‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺑﻊ( ‪71 ........................................‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬‫)ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ( ‪72 ................................‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬‫)‪73 ........................... (Color Space‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬‫)ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪74 .....................‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪74 ......................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫‪76‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪76 ..........‬‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪76 ...............‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪77 .......................‬‬‫‪AR 4‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪78 ........‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‪79 ................‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪79 ..........................‬‬‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪80 ................................‬‬‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪81 .................................‬‬‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪81 ..................................‬‬‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪81 ...................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻣﺭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫)]‪82 ......................... ([Share Order‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ‬‫)]‪،[0] ،[Share Order Selected‬‬‫]‪82 ......................([Erase Selected‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪83 ............................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪83 .........................‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬‫‪84‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪84 .........................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪/Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪85 ........................ Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )‪85 ..............(Card Setup‬‬‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪85 ...... (Card Setup‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ )‪86 .... (Reset‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻼﺕ )‪86 ...... (Myset‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ )‪87 ...... (Picture Mode‬‬‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪87 .........................(K‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬‫)‪88 ............. (Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )‪88 ............. (j/Y‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬‫)‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء( ‪89 ......................‬‬‫ﺗﻧﻭﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ( ‪90 .............‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﺎﺕ ﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ( ‪93 ..........‬‬‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﻭﺭ‬‫)‪94 .................... (Keystone Comp.‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ‬‫)]♥[‪95 ...........(Anti-Shockz/Silent‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )‪(hi-res shot‬‬‫)‪95 ........................(High Res Shot‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪96 ....................‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻠﺗﻔﺔ )‪96 ..................(R‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪96 ..........................‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺎﺕ ‪98 ..........................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪99 ............................‬‬‫‪) X‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ(‪99 ....................‬‬‫‪) W‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ(‪99 ....................‬‬‫‪) i‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‪99 ..................‬‬‫‪99 .................................. Rec View‬‬‫‪99 ........................... Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫‪99 ....................... c Menu Display‬‬‫‪99 .................................. Firmware‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪100 .....................‬‬‫‪100 ................................ AF/MF R‬‬‫‪101 ............... Button/Dial/Lever S‬‬‫‪101 ....................... Release/j T‬‬‫‪102 ........................Disp/8/PC U‬‬‫‪104 ....................... Exp/p/ISO V‬‬‫‪105 ..........................# Custom W‬‬‫‪105 .....................K/Color/WB X‬‬‫‪106 .....................Record/Erase Y‬‬‫‪107 ................................. Movie Z‬‬‫‪109 ........................Built-In EVF b‬‬‫‪109 ............................K Utility k‬‬‫‪110 ................................. AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪111 ................................MF Assist‬‬‫‪111 ................ t Lever Function‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪112 .........‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬‫)‪113 .............. (KControl Settings‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪114 ...................‬‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ‪115 .........................................‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪118‬‬‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪119 .............................‬‬‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ‪95 ......................‬‬‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻻﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ‪116 .......................................‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬‫‪116 .............................selfie assist‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪117 ........‬‬‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪120 .....................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪120 ........‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪121 ............‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪122 ............................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ‪122 ..............................‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻣﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ‪123 ...............................‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪123 ......‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪124‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪124 ................‬‬‫ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪124 .......................‬‬‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪125 .........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ )‪127 .......... (PictBridge‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ ‪127 ...............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪128 ..........................‬‬‫ﺣﺟﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪129 .......................(DPOF‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪129 ..........................‬‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪130 ...........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪131‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪131 ...............................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ‪131 .........‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪132 ............................‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬‫ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪133 .................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬‫‪134‬‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL‬‬‫‪135 ...............................................‬‬‫‪5 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫‪139‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪139 ..................... (HLD-8‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪141 .....................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪141 ....................‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪143 ..............‬‬‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪143 ............................‬‬‫ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪144 ....................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪146‬‬‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪146 .................‬‬‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪148 ......................................‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪150 .......................‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪150 ..............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪150 .......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪150 ........................................‬‬‫‪ - Pixel Mapping‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪151 ...............................‬‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪152 ......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪159 .......................................‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪162‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪162 .................................‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫‪168‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫‪AR 6‬‬‫‪177‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬‫‪(A) iAUTO‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫‪60‬‬‫ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ )‪(SCN‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫ﺗﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬‫‪Live Guide‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫‪47‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻫﺩ ًﻓﺎ ﻣﺗﺣﺭ ًﻛﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻲ ﺇﺣﺳﺎﺳًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‬‫‪Live Guide‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪Live Guide‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫‪36‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ )‪(SCN‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪35‬‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫‪55‬‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬‫‪56‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪70‬‬‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ )‪(ART‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬‫‪25‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪/‬ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬‫‪AF Area‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬‫‪48‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫‪) C-AF+TR‬ﺗﻌﻘﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪ISO/DIS Mode‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫‪/Image Stabilizer‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪Anti-shock‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪58‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‬‫‪143‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻗﺑﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬‫‪50‬‬‫‪50‬‬‫‪51‬‬‫‪54/28‬‬‫‪59/57‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪63‬‬‫‪(Picture Mode) Gradation‬‬‫‪72‬‬‫‪7 AR‬‬‫ﻟﻸﺿﻭﺍء‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻲ‬‫‪37‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣُﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ )‪(SCN‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﻓﺎﺗﺣﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ‬‫‪(Picture Mode) Gradation‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ‪/‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫‪Highlight&Shadow Control‬‬‫‪72‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻁﺧﺎﺕ(‬‫‪Noise Reduct.‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪/‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪/‬‬‫‪Live View Boost‬‬‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ‬‫‪67‬‬‫‪Test Picture‬‬‫‪67‬‬‫ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬‫‪22‬‬‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﻟﻸﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪52‬‬‫‪104‬‬‫‪102/99‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻣﺩ‬‫‪Displayed Grid‬‬‫‪102‬‬‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫‪(Rec View) AUTOq‬‬‫‪99‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪58‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ )‪(SCN‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‬‫‪58‬‬‫ﺇﻁﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻣﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪Quick Sleep Mode‬‬‫‪110‬‬‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫‪61‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪120‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫]♥[‪Silent‬‬‫‪59‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‬‫‪AR 8‬‬‫‪47/22‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻣﻳﻕ‬‫‪HDMI/Video Out‬‬‫‪102‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫‪112‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬‫‪80‬‬‫ﺗﻔﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ‬‫‪(JPEG Edit) Shadow Adj‬‬‫‪97‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬‫‪(JPEG Edit) Redeye Fix‬‬‫‪97‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬‫ﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬‫‪127‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬‫‪129‬‬‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪120‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫‪121‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬

‫‪v‬‬

‫‪v‬‬

‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬‫‪Reset‬‬‫‪86‬‬‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫‪Myset‬‬‫‪86‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪99‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪) 8‬ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺔ(‬‫‪103‬‬‫‪9 AR‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬‫‪2 1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪c‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪d‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪l‬‬

‫‪f‬‬
‫‪g‬‬
‫‪h‬‬

‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪0‬‬

‫‪m‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪j‬‬
‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ................. (Fn3) (LV) u‬ﺹ‪66 ،21 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ* )‪(o‬‬‫‪..............‬ﺹ‪69 – 68 ،62 ،47–46 ،37 – 34 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) R‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ(‪.................. H/‬ﺹ‪82 ،66 ،39 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ .......................... Fn2‬ﺹ‪111 ،68 ،52 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪24 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪12 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ* )‪ ..... (r‬ﺹ‪79 ،37 – 34 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ....................... (Fn4) HDR‬ﺹ‪66 ،53 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪15 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) z‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ( ‪ .................................‬ﺹ‪67 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ )ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪(.‬‬‫‪ b‬ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ‪.....................‬ﺹ‪98 ،82 ،74 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ‪ .............................. ON/OFF‬ﺹ‪17 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ‪ ..........................‬ﺹ‪23 .‬‬‫‪a‬‬‫‪ e‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ ...............................‬ﺹ‪23 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪143 .‬‬‫‪ g‬ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪ ........................................‬ﺹ‪/58 .‬ﺹ‪100 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬‫‪ i‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪ .................................‬ﺹ‪15 .‬‬‫‪ j‬ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪ k‬ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ )ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ‪(l3.5‬‬‫‪ l‬ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪ .................... (D‬ﺹ‪112 .‬‬‫‪ m‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ‪ .................‬ﺹ‪127 ،124 ،112 .‬‬‫* ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ‪ r‬ﻭ ‪ o‬ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻧﻔﺫ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 10‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬

‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪a‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪b‬‬
‫‪c‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪d‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪e‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪f‬‬
‫‪j‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪g‬‬
‫‪h‬‬
‫‪i‬‬

‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺭﺹ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻭﺑﺗﺭ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪21 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ( ‪ .....‬ﺹ‪83 ،76 ،46 ،21 ،19 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪21 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬‫‪ 5‬ﻓﻧﺟﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪143 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ...............................‬ﺹ‪141 ،63 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ........................................ Fn1‬ﺹ‪66 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ‪ ...............................‬ﺹ‪111 ،37 – 34 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ .................................. MENU‬ﺹ‪84 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ‬‫‪ a‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ............................... INFO‬ﺹ‪77 ،22 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ............................. Q‬ﺹ‪84 ،47 –46 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ* ‪ ......................................‬ﺹ‪78 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) q‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪78 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) D‬ﻣﺳﺢ( ‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪81 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬‫‪ g‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ ................. (PBH‬ﺹ‪139 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ....................‬ﺹ‪13 .‬‬‫‪ i‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ......................‬ﺹ‪13 .‬‬‫‪ j‬ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ........................................‬ﺹ‪14 .‬‬‫‪ k‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ................................‬ﺹ‪14 .‬‬‫* ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ‪ HIGF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻧﻔﺫ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪11 AR‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ‬‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ‬‫ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺍﺷﺗﺭﻳﺕ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ‬‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‬‫ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪FL-LM3‬‬‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ‬‫‪BLN-1‬‬‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺧﻳﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺑﺷﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 12‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪USB‬‬‫‪CB-USB6‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ‬‫‪BCN-1‬‬‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬‫ٍ‬‫ﻳﺿﻲء ﺑﻠﻭﻥ‬‫ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬‫ﺧﻠﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬‫ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺑﻠﻭﻥ‬‫ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ‬‫ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺟﺎﻩ )‪(C‬‬‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬‫)ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ :‬ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ(‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ ﺛﻡ ﺃﺧﺭﺝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ "ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(131 .‬‬‫‪13 AR‬‬‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪) SD‬ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳًﺎ( ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،SDXC ،SDHC ،SD :‬ﻭ‬‫‪.Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﺍﻗﺭﺃ "ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪ (132 .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺭﱢ ﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪(132 .‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﻣﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ُﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﻗﺳﺭً ﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫)ﺹ‪.(19 .‬‬‫‪AR 14‬‬‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫• ﺍﻧﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻏﻁﺎء ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﺣﻣﺭﺍء( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ )ﺣﻣﺭﺍء( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ )ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻬﻡ ‪.(3‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻗﺭﺃ "ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ" )ﺹ‪.(134 .‬‬‫‪15 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻭﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺁﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﻣﺗﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪) "selfie assist‬ﺹ‪(116 .‬‬‫‪AR 16‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪.OFF‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ‪ON/OFF‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ‪.ON‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪‬‬‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫; )ﺃﺧﺿﺭ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫)ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺷﺭ ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪(.‬‬‫‪) :‬ﺃﺧﺿﺭ(‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫] )ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‪ :‬ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻭﻥ" )ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﻧﺷﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ )ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ،q‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ُﺗﺭﻛﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪17 AR‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﻳﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [X‬ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪) [d‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪MENU‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪j/Y /‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﺑﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ [d‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [X‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Setup Menu‬‬‫‪--.--.-- --:-‬‬‫‪English‬‬‫‪j±0 k±0‬‬‫‪0.5sec‬‬

‫‪X‬‬
‫‪W‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Rec View‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫‪c Menu Display‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪[d‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫‪Time‬‬‫‪Y/M/D‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪2015‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻧﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﻟﻠﻣﺻﻧﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ‪ 0‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪.[min‬‬‫‪AR 18‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪e UTO1‬‬
‫‪f‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪g TO‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪i 3‬‬‫‪j N‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪m‬‬

‫‪1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0a‬‬‫‪b‬‬‫‪FPS‬‬‫‪off‬‬‫‪28mm‬‬‫‪E‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi FP RC BKT‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪-2.0‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬

‫‪D‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪z‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪cd‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪y‬‬
‫‪+7‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪-3‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪1023‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪q p‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .........................‬ﺹ‪14 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ‪ ........‬ﺹ‪123–118 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ ............................. Super FP‬ﺹ‪141 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ....................................... RC‬ﺹ‪141 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‬‫‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪/90 .‬ﺹ‪53 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ‪ .......................‬ﺹ‪93 .‬‬‫ﻋﺎﻝ ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪102 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ٍ‬‫‪ 8‬ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﻳﻠﻲ‪-‬ﻛﻭﻧﻔﺭﺗﺭ ﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪88 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪89 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪/‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‪ .........................‬ﺹ‪49 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ........................................‬ﺹ‪74 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪/‬ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬‫‪ ......................... m‬ﺹ‪/137 .‬ﺹ‪149 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ..............................................‬ﺹ‪63 .‬‬‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪،‬‬‫)ﻳﻭﻣﺽ‪ٍ :‬‬‫ﻳﺿﻲء‪ :‬ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻠﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ(‬‫‪ d‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ......................‬ﺹ‪24 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪57 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪30 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪28 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫‪ g‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪55 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪/Anti-shock‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ‪/‬‬‫ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪59 ،58 .‬‬

‫‪r‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪x‬‬
‫‪w‬‬

‫‪vuts‬‬‫‪ i‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫‪ j‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‪ ...................‬ﺹ‪61 .‬‬‫‪ k‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪62 .‬‬‫‪ l‬ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺡ‬‫‪ m‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‪ ..............‬ﺹ‪133 .‬‬‫‪ n‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ ‪ .................‬ﺹ‪52 .‬‬‫‪ o‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ .....................‬ﺹ‪66 .‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ‪ ..................‬ﺹ‪47 .‬‬‫‪ p‬ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬‫‪ q‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪ ..................‬ﺹ‪47 .‬‬‫‪ r‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪ ..........................‬ﺹ‪37 – 34 .‬‬‫‪ s‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ...............................‬ﺹ‪37 – 34 .‬‬‫‪ t‬ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪22 .‬‬‫‪ u‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ‪ ...............................................‬ﺹ‪67 .‬‬‫‪ v‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .................‬ﺹ‪110 .‬‬‫‪ w‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪40 – 23 .‬‬‫‪ ............................................Myset x‬ﺹ‪86 .‬‬‫‪ y‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ‪ .........‬ﺹ‪25 .‬‬‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪66 .‬‬‫‪ A‬ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ..................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪54 .‬‬‫‪ B‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪51 .‬‬‫‪ C‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪54 .‬‬‫‪ D‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪63 .‬‬‫‪ E‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪ F‬ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ‪ ...........................‬ﺹ‪26 .‬‬‫‪19 AR‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬‫‪G‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi RL‬‬‫‪28mm‬‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪TC 00:00:00:00 DF‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪H‬‬
‫‪I‬‬

‫‪P‬‬
‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪n WMUTX 01:02:03‬‬‫‪J‬‬‫‪ G‬ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ ...................‬ﺹ‪107 ،74 .‬‬‫‪ H‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ‪ ..................‬ﺹ‪41 .‬‬‫‪ I‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪74 .‬‬‫‪ ..................................Movie Effect J‬ﺹ‪40 .‬‬‫‪ K‬ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪108 .‬‬‫‪AR 20‬‬‫‪K‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻭﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ u‬ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪u‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫ﻳﺿﻲء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺗﺭﺏ ﻋﻳﻧﻙ ﻣﻧﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺿﻲء ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻧﻁﻔﺊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫‪Q‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬‫‪Recommended ISO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻭﺑﺗﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬‫ﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﻫ ًﺗﺎ‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬‫ﺿﻐﻁﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ،Q‬ﻓﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‬‫ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪21 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪1‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪2‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ‬‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ‬‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﻳﺗﻡ‬‫ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﺳﺎﻁﻊ‬‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬‫ﺃﻗﻝ‬‫ﻣﻌﺗﻡ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬‫ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ "ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻝ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ "ﺍﻷﻓﻕ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻛﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 22‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﻟﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪.................. A‬ﺹ‪26 .‬‬‫‪................... SCN‬ﺹ‪28 .‬‬‫‪................... ART‬ﺹ‪30 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪........................J‬ﺹ‪32 .‬‬‫‪........................ P‬ﺹ‪34 .‬‬‫‪........................A‬ﺹ‪35 .‬‬‫‪........................ S‬ﺹ‪36 .‬‬‫‪........................M‬ﺹ‪37 .‬‬‫‪...................... n‬ﺹ‪39 .‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﺗﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻳﻕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‬‫‪23 AR‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ(‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )((‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺿﺭ )ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪28mm‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻳﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(146 .‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺣﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ )ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ(‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺻﻭ ًﺗﺎ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻛﻠﻳًﺎ‬‫ﻳﺷﺗﻣﻝ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻁﻠﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ "ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ" ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻲ "ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‬‫)ﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ( ﻛﻠﻳًﺎ"‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‬‫‪AR 24‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪ T‬ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪V‬‬

‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪T‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ) ‪( V‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ S‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬

‫‪7‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪Off‬‬‫‪3x‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ‬‫‪ Y‬ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪ Z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪/e-portrait/3D/Panorama‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪/‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺿﻭﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪/‬‬‫ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪/‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭﺓ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻅﺎﻓﺭﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺷﻳﺎء ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬‫‪25 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪iAUTO‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺑﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﻛﻝ‬‫ﺷﻲء‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﺭﻳﺣً ﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﺑﺗﺩﺋﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺗﺟﻌﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Change Color Saturation‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪AR 26‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺃﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪ a‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪ k‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[Shooting Tips‬ﺣﺩّﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ a‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬‫]‪ [Blur Background‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[Express Motions‬ﺳﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺭﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭّ ﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ 2‬ﻭ ‪.3‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬‫‪Clear & Vivid‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪Flat & Muted‬‬‫‪Change Color Saturation‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫• ]‪ [Blur Background‬ﻭ ]‪ [Express Motions‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [YN+RAW‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ‪.RAW‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻝ ﻣﻌﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪.[Blurred Motion‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺗﺗﺧﻁﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﻁﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪27 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﺷﻬ ًﺩﺍ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫• ﺳ ُﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺷﻬﺩًﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ )‪.(GF‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ I‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SCN‬‬‫‪Portrait‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪G‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Portrait‬‬‫‪e-Portrait‬‬‫‪Landscape‬‬‫‪Landscape+Portrait‬‬‫‪Sport‬‬‫‪Hand-Held Starlight‬‬‫‪Night Scene‬‬‫‪Night+Portrait‬‬‫‪Children‬‬

‫‪H‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪q‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪r‬‬
‫‪Q‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪s‬‬

‫‪High Key‬‬‫‪Low Key‬‬‫‪DIS Mode‬‬‫‪Macro‬‬‫‪Nature Macro‬‬‫‪Candle‬‬‫‪Sunset‬‬‫‪Documents‬‬‫‪) Panorama‬ﺹ‪(29 .‬‬‫( ‪Fireworks‬‬‫‪Beach & Snow g‬‬‫‪n Fisheye Effect f‬‬‫‪n Wide-Angle w‬‬‫‪n Macro m‬‬‫‪3D Photo T‬‬‫‪Panning J‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻓﺎﺋﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[e-Portrait‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪ :‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺩﻟﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ]‪ [e-Portrait‬ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻫﻭ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ‬‫‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫• ]‪ ،[n Wide-Angle] ،[n Fisheye Effect‬ﻭ ]‪ [n Macro‬ﻫﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[Panorama] ،[Hand-Held Starlight] ،[e-Portrait‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[3D Photo‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[Hand-Held Starlight‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ 8‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﻫﻭ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫‪AR 28‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫• ﻳﺧﺿﻊ ]‪ [3D Photo‬ﻟﻠﻘﻳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ [3D Photo‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.1024 × 1824‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺻﻳﻐﺔ ‪.RAW‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ‪.100%‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[Panning‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻌﻘﺏ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﺭﻳﺢ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻟﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺗﺩﻓﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[Panning‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ J‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ I‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺷﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺷﻲء‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻟﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ]‪ ،[Panning‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺿﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺳﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﻳﺔ‪" v .‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ" )ﺹ‪.(124 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Panorama‬ﻓﻲ ‪ SCN‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫]‪[3‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫]‪[2‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭﻱ )‪ (g‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻟﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻳﻌﻭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻳﻧﻬﻲ ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻧﻭﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪29 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪AR 30‬‬‫ﻳُﻧﺷﺊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ُﺗﺭﻛﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪k‬‬

‫‪Pop Art‬‬‫‪Soft Focus‬‬‫‪l‬‬‫ﻳُﻧﺷﺊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺑﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺿﻭء ﺩﺍﻓﺊ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺷﺗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻛﻛﻝ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫‪ Pale&Light Color‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﻧﺷﺊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺑﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻭ ﺫﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻧﺷﺊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻧﻌﻳﻡ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ ﻭﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪.‬‬

‫‪m‬‬
‫‪n‬‬

‫‪Light Tone‬‬‫‪Grainy Film‬‬‫ﻳﻧﺷﺊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺑﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺧﺷﻭﻧﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪Pin Hole‬‬‫ﻳُﻧﺷﺊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻟﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻗﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬‫ﺗﻌﺗﻳﻡ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪s‬‬‫‪Diorama‬‬‫‪t‬‬‫‪Cross Process‬‬

‫‪u‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪Gentle Sepia‬‬‫‪Dramatic Tone‬‬‫ﻳُﻧﺷﺊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ُﺗﺭﻛﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻅﻼﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﻧﺷﺊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺷﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻣُﺻﻐﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺷﻭﻳﻪ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣُﺭﻛﺯﻩ ﺑﺅﺭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﻧﺷﺊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻌﺑﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻭ ﺳﺭﻳﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻧﺷﻰء ‪ Cross Process II‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ُﺗﺭﻛﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﻧﺷﺊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺣﺏ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ ﻭﺗﻧﻌﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﻛﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪Y‬‬‫‪Key Line‬‬‫ﻳُﻧﺷﺊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ُﺗﺭﻛﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﻭﺗﺿﻳﻑ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺑًﺎ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Z‬‬‫‪Watercolor‬‬‫ﻳُﻧﺷﺊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺯﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﺑﺔ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻣﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻧﻌﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﻣﺢ‪.‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫‪Vintage‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺑﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺣﻧﻳﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﺗﻳﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻭﺷﺣﻭﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻉ‪.‬‬‫‪H‬‬‫‪Partial Color‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺑﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺛﻳﺭ ﻟﻺﻋﺟﺎﺏ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﻼﺹ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﻳﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪u‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫)ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ‪(ART‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﻧﺳﺦ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.ART‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳ ُﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺭﺷﺣً ﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ‬‫)‪.(GF‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪Pop Art‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫• ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ‪ART‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ I‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ I‬ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ‪ I‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ II‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﻭﻗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ*‬‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻧﺎﻋﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻘﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﺑﻭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء‪ ،‬ﺿﻭء ﻧﺟﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‬‫* ﺗﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻓﺎﺋﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [YN+RAW‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ "ﺣﺑﻳﺑﻳﺔ"‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﻡ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺷﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‬‫ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺔ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (r‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (o‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ‬‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﻼﺻﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫)‪ (r‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (o‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪COLOR‬‬‫‪31 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪PHOTO STORY‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ .PHOTO STORY‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻭﻉ ‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Standard‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫‪Standard :A‬‬‫‪Speed :B‬‬‫‪Zoom In/Out :C‬‬‫‪Layout :D‬‬‫‪Fun Frames :F‬‬‫‪Works in progress :Q‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻧﺳﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،I‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻼﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪E‬‬‫‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‬‫‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻧﺳﺏ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻥ ‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪HGF‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﻟﻺﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻭﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭ ‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻬﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.0‬‬‫• ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ،MENU‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Save‬ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Finish later‬ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(33 .‬‬‫]‪ :[Discard‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 32‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ D‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻳﻪ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪.O‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‬‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪250 F5.0‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ ،PHOTO STORY‬ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﻭ ]‪/([Speed‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [YN+RAW‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫‪ PHOTO STORY‬ﺑﺻﻳﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺻﻳﻐﺔ ‪ .RAW‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫]‪.[4:3‬‬‫• ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ]‪ [MF] ،[S-AF] ،[AF Mode‬ﻭ ]‪ [S-AF+MF‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫‪/Movie‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﻭ ]‪/([Speed‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪Picture mode/Digital Tele-converter/‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ INFO/Fn2/Fn1‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ ،PHOTO STORY‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻭﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻺﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SD‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.J‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪.Q Works in progress‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺟﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪33 AR‬‬‫"ﺻﻭﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ" )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪(P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ‬‫ّ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ P‬ﻫﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ‬‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.P‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫• ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪r‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﻳﻥ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺗﺎ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ(‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬‫‪"60 F2.8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻥ ﺟﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪8000 F22‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ ﺟﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ )ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء(‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪ [ISO‬ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪) [ISO] v .‬ﺹ‪(54 .‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪(Ps‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪ ،ART‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ"‪ "s‬ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ GF‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ "‪."s‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪Ps‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫‪AR 34‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪(A‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﻫﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺩﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻝ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ )ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ F‬ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬‫ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺧﻔﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ )ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ F‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪r‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪F11 F8.0 F5.6 F4.0 F2.8‬‬‫• ﺳﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬‫‪"60 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪8000 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺧﺗﻑِ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ )ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء(‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء‬‫• ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪ [ISO‬ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪) [ISO] v .‬ﺹ‪(54 .‬‬‫‪35 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ‪(S‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ S‬ﻫﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﺗﺩﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.S‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻬﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻬﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺿﻳﻑ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﻬﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪r‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ ‪‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ‬‫"‪8000 250 125 60 30 15 60‬‬‫• ﺳﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬‫‪2000 F2.8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﻲء‪.‬‬‫‪125 F22‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺧﺗﻑِ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ )ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء(‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء‬‫• ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪ [ISO‬ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪) [ISO] v .‬ﺹ‪(54 .‬‬‫‪AR 36‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ )ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪(M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﻫﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻛﻼً ﻣﻥ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣً ﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.M‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺭﻕ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻘﻳﺱ‬‫ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ 1/8000‬ﻭ ‪ 60‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]‪ [BULB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[LIVE TIME‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[LIVECOMP‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪r‬‬

‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ(‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺳﻭﻑ‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Live View Boost‬ﺹ‪ (102 .‬ﻓﻲ ‪.Custom Menu‬‬‫• ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ ،[Noise Reduct.‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻻ ﺗﺯﺍﻝ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺑﻳﺋﻳﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﺦ( ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻭﻟﺩ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬‫ﻋﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻳﺿﺎ ً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ٍ ISO‬‬‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﻧﺷﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪) [Noise Reduct.] v .‬ﺹ‪(104 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺯﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ )‪(BULB‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [BULB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[LIVE TIME‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ )‪:(BULB‬‬‫ﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣً ﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ )‪ :(TIME‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺿﻐﻁﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺿﻐﻁﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳَﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪) "Bulb/Time Monitor" v‬ﺹ‪(104 .‬‬‫‪37 AR‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ ،[LIVE TIME‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬‫ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪) [Live Bulb‬ﺹ‪ (104 .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫• ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻗﻳﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼً ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ )ﺹ‪.(143 .‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻗﻳﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺯﻣﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ AE‬ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪/‬ﻣﺛﺑّﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ* ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫* ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ]‪ [Live Bulb‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Live Time‬ﺹ‪.(104 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟ ُﻣﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ) ُﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﺣﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻭء(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻼﺣﻅ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺟﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻟﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ]‪) [Composite Settings‬ﺹ‪.(104 .‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[LIVECOMP‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[LIVECOMP‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [Composite Settings‬ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻣﺭﺟﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﻫﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻗﻳﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼً ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ )ﺹ‪.(143 .‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻗﻳﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺯﻣﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ AE‬ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪/‬ﻣﺛﺑّﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 38‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ‪.(PHOTO STORY) J‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪R‬‬‫‪42mm‬‬‫‪TC 00:00:00:00 DF‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪00:02:18‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ،CMOS‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ‬‫ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﺯﻳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺟﺭﻱ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﻓﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪ 10‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .All-Intra‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﺿﻌًﺎ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻭﺿﺑﺎﺏ ﻣﻠﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻭﺿﺑﺎﺏ ﻣﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ )ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪/(.‬ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪/‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺿﻭﺍء‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/Panorama/‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Hand-Held ،e-Portrait) SCN‬‬‫‪/(3D ،Starlight‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء‬‫‪39 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )‪(n‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )‪ ،(n‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪" v .‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ" )ﺹ‪(74 .‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗِﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ]‪[Movie Effect‬‬‫‪‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.n‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪Art Fade‬‬‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﺷﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫‪Old Film‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪Multi Echo‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗِﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗِﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺧﻠﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪T‬‬‫‪One Shot Echo‬‬‫ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗِﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗِﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻳﺯﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫‪Movie Tele‬‬‫‪converter‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Art Fade‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺭﺭ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ‪.‬‬‫‪Old Film‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Multi Echo‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪One Shot Echo‬‬‫ﻛﻝ ﻟﻣﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺭﻣﺯ ﺗﺿﻳﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 40‬‬

‫‪Movie Tele-converter‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ O‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Movie tele-converter‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.HIGF‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﻔﻳﻑ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻥ ﻓﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ 10‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ‪ mode1‬ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﺹ‪ ،(108 .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺧﻼﻑ ‪.Movie Tele-converter‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ [e-Portrait‬ﻭ ]‪ [Diorama‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﻊ ‪.Art Fade‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻭﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ Art Fade‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪/‬ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺧﻼﻑ ‪.Movie Tele-converter‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ N‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ )‪(Movie+Photo Mode‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬‫‪ .R‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ‪.(16:9) XN‬‬‫• ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪) [Movie+Photo Mode] v .‬ﺹ‪(108 .‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪[Movie+Photo Mode‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[mode1‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 30p‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﻛﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻛﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻣﺱ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ*‪/‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ‪/‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪/‬‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪/‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫* ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ‬‫‪42mm‬‬‫‪TC 00:00:00:00 DF‬‬‫‪00:02:18‬‬‫‪41 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ "‪"My Clips‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﻠﻑ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ‪ My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺃﻓﻼﻣًﺎ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ )ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ(‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬‫‪.My Clips‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.n‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺩّﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪01:01:07‬‬‫‪HD N‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪FHD SF‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪FHD F FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ MOV FHD F 30p‬ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ]‪ [Frame Rate‬ﻭ ]‪.[Clip Recording Time‬‬‫• ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻘﺿﺎء ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬‫‪ R‬ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻭﺑﺩء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‬‫)ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ 16‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻛﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ(‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻭﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﻓﻲ ‪ My Clips‬ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ،My Clips‬ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪G‬‬‫ﻳُﻐﻳّﺭ ‪ My Clips‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻓﻳﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﻓﻳﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﻳﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻔﻅﻪ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ‪ My Clips‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻓﻲ ‪ My Clips‬ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪ My Clips‬ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪AR 42‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ q‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪.c‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Play My Clips‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ .GF‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪ My Clips‬ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ "‪"My Clips‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﻠﻑ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ .My Clips‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .My Clips‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ q‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫‪Sat‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪Fri‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Thu‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Wed‬‬‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪10‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪17‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫‪23‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪19‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 11:24 MOV‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪p‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪c 12:12 MOV‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪*My Clips‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪p‬‬

‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬‫‪p‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪2015.1‬‬‫‪Tue‬‬‫‪Mon‬‬‫‪Sun‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 11:23 MOV‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬

‫‪Q‬‬
‫*‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ‪ My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻫﻧﺎ )ﺹ‪(42 .‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ My Clips‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Play My Clips‬‬‫ﻳُﻌﻳﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪ My Clips‬ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Play Movie‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪Rearrange Order‬‬‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫‪Preset Destination‬‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ c My Clips‬ﻫﺫﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪Delete My Clips‬‬‫ﻳﺣﺫﻑ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ D‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ‪ .My Clips‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪[Yes‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ‪ My Clips‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Export My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Clip Effects‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ 6‬ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪Transition Effect‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﺷﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪BGM‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Joy‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫‪Recorded Clip Volume‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ‪ BGM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Joy‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻸﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪Recorded Clip Sound‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ‬‫‪ BGM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫‪Preview‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ My Clips‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪43 AR‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Begin Export‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣُﺟﻣّﻊ ﻛﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ‪ My Clips‬ﻫﻭ ‪ 15‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻫﻭ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ My Clips‬ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ Full HD‬ﻭ ‪.Fine‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪ My Clips‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻧﺯﻉ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ‪ 99‬ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ‪ My Clips‬ﻭﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ‪ 99‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻭﻯ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺟﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻭﻁﻭﻝ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪/‬ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ nc‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.n‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺩّﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪c 30p‬‬‫‪×3.75‬‬‫‪01:01:07‬‬‫‪HD N‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪FHD SF‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪) MOVnFHD F 30p‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬‫‪.INFO‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺿﺭﺏ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻠﻝ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺏ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﻁﻲء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺑﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻱ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻁﻲء‪/‬ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺕ ﻫﻭ ]‪.[All-Intra‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻁﻲء‪/‬ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻫﻭ ]‪ [60p‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[50p‬‬‫‪AR 44‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪c 30p‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪OFF‬‬‫‪MOV 1920×1080‬‬‫‪Fine‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬

‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬‫‪Recommended ISO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪c ba‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪e d‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪Recommended ISO‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻏﺎﻟﺑﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪f‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ..................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪54 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪63 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪66 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪ ................‬ﺹ‪58 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪55 .‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ‪ ....................‬ﺹ‪56 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ ‪ ................................N‬ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ‪ ..........................................J‬ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺑﻊ ‪ .........................................T‬ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪ ..................................z‬ﺹ‪72 .‬‬‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ‪ ......................x‬ﺹ‪72 .‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ......................... y‬ﺹ‪73 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪73 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪66 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪49 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪54 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ ...............................‬ﺹ‪62 ،61 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪51 .‬‬‫ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪48 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪57 .‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪) "Quick Sleep Mode" v .‬ﺹ‪(110 .‬‬‫‪45 AR‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.M/S/A/P‬‬‫‪Recommended ISO‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻗﺩ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺳﻠ ًﻔﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ SCN ،A‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ART‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،PHOTO STORY‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ‪ KControl Settings‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Live Control‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ART ،M ،S ،A ،P ،A‬ﻭ ‪) .SCN‬ﺹ‪(102 .‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪P‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫‪Program Auto‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬‫ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ* ‪ ...........................................‬ﺹ‪57 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ*‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ .............................................‬ﺹ‪28 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪30 .‬‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ* ‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪55 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ*‪ .....................‬ﺹ‪58 .‬‬‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ*‪ ..........................................‬ﺹ‪62 .‬‬‫* ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫‪AR 46‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ............................................. *n‬ﺹ‪40 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ............................................‬ﺹ‪63 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪66 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‪ .............................................‬ﺹ‪54 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ*‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪51 .‬‬‫ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ..........................................*ISO‬ﺹ‪54 .‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ*‪ ............................................‬ﺹ‪49 .‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ* ‪ ..................................‬ﺹ‪74 .‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬‫• ﺗﺳﺭﻱ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ‬‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪8‬‬‫ٍ‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬‫‪ r‬ﺃﻭ ‪HI‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬

‫‪o‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪G‬‬

‫ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺑﺔ )"‪ ("+‬ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻋًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻟﺑﺔ )"–"( ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻏﻣﻕ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺑـ ‪.±5.0 EV‬‬‫ﻣﻭﺟﺏ )‪(+‬‬‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ )‪(0‬‬‫ﺳﺎﻟﺏ )–(‬

‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪.SCN‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ .±3.0 EV‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ‪ ،±3.0 EV‬ﻓﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ‬‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.±3.0 EV‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ )‪(AE Lock‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ .Fn1‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪"AEL/AFL" v .u‬‬‫)ﺹ‪(110 .‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺯﺭ ‪ ،MENU‬ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪47 AR‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ‪ 81‬ﻫﺩ ًﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ" ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺭﻛﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﺩﻑ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‬‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‬‫ﺗﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺟﻡ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Image Aspect] ،[Digital Tele-converter‬ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ )ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﺹ‪.(49 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪GF‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪) o‬ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ(‬‫‪) I‬ﻫﺩﻑ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ(‬‫ﺗﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭﺕ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪) K‬ﻫﺩﻑ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪) J‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ(‬‫ﺗﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 48‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺣﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬‫ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻭﺗﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻭﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ )‪ (ESP‬ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪J‬‬‫‪Face Priority Off‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪I‬‬‫‪Face Priority On‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪K‬‬‫‪Face & Eye Priority On‬‬‫ﻳﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺅﺑﺅ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪L‬‬‫‪Face & R. Eye Priority On‬‬‫ﻳﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺅﺑﺅ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫‪Face & L. Eye Priority On‬‬‫ﻳﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺅﺑﺅ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻁ ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‬‫ﺃﺧﺿﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺣﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻟﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[(Digital ESP metering) p‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﻁﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺟﻭﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‪ .[MF‬ﻭﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﻔﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء‪.‬‬‫‪49 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ )‪(Super Spot AF‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻐﻁﻳﻬﺎ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪Off‬‬

‫‪F‬‬

‫‪F‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬‫‪U‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬‫‪) U‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ(‪Q /‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ‪) a‬ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ( ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪[Button Function‬‬‫)ﺹ‪.(66 .‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ U‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ U‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ‪(14× ،10× ،7× ،5× ،3×) .‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (r‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪.(o‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺣﺭﻛﻪ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻙ ﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪.‬‬‫‪AR 50‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ(‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬‫‪AF Mode‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪P‬‬
‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪Single AF‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪TR‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫‪AUTOS-AF C-AF‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫)ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫)ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ(‬‫‪MF‬‬‫)ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ(‬‫‪S-AF+MF‬‬‫)ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬‫‪ S-AF‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ(‬‫‪C-AF+TR‬‬‫)ﺗﻌﻘﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺻﺩﺭ‬‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﻭﺗﺿﻲء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬‫ﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﻅﻝ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺿﻲء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻐﻣﺔ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[S-AF‬‬‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ‬‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﻗﺭﻳﺏ‬‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[S-AF‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ؛ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩﺋ ٍﺫ ﺑﺗﻌﻘﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻌﺩ ﺑﻭﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻌﻘﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺭﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺛﻡ ﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[S-AF‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﻌﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺟﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﺑﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺻﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺯﻻﺝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ )‪ (MF‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) .MF‬ﺹ‪(136 .‬‬‫‪51 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Highlight&Shadow Control‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ .Fn2‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪HI LIGHT‬‬‫‪SHADOW‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )‪(Color Creator‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ Color Creator‬ﻫﻭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Fn2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ‪ Color Creator‬ﻭﺣﺭّ ﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪color creator‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Fn2‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪Fn2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ‪ Color Creator‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ‪ (Color Creator) c‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪.(70 .‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.AUTO‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫‪AR 52‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪) HDR‬ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ(‬‫ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺟﻣﻊ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ‪ .(HDR‬ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ]‪ [HDR1‬ﻭ ]‪ [HDR2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،A ،P‬ﻭ ‪ .S‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‬‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ HDR‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪.HDR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.HDR‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪HDR‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪3F‬‬‫‪3.0EV‬‬‫‪7F‬‬‫‪2.0EV‬‬‫‪5F‬‬‫‪2.0EV‬‬‫‪3F‬‬‫‪2.0EV‬‬‫‪HDR2‬‬‫‪HDR1‬‬‫‪OFF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫‪HDR1‬‬‫‪HDR2‬‬‫‪3F 2.0EV‬‬‫‪5F 2.0EV‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ‪ 4‬ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ‪ HDR2‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﺛﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺟﺎﺏ ﻣﻥ ‪ .HDR1‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.200‬‬‫ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻁﺄ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ‪ 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻫﻭ ‪ 4‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪7F 2.0EV‬‬‫‪3F 3.0EV‬‬‫‪5F 3.0EV‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻘﺭﺍﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ]‪ [HDR1‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[HDR2‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ .RAW+JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ‬‫‪ RAW‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[HDR2]/[HDR1‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Natural‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]‪ .[sRGB‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ]‪.[Full-time AF‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪53 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ )ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ(‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‪.‬‬‫‪Metering‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪p‬‬‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻲ ‪ 324‬ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‬‫ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ]‪ [OFF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫]‪ ([I Face Priority‬ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪H‬‬‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻱ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬‫ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻗﻳﺎﺳًﺎ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪I‬‬‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ )ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 2%‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ(‬‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪IHI‬‬‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‬‫ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ISH‬ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ -‬ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ )ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﻳﺑﻲ( ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﻌﻑ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻑ ﻫﻭ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ — ISO 200‬ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ — ﺛﻡ ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Recommended ISO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪AR 54‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪25600–200 ،LOW‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‬‫ﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )‪ (WB‬ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺩ‬‫]‪ [AUTO‬ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻋﻧﺩ ﻓﺷﻝ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻏﺑﺗﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﻣﺗﻌﻣﺩ ﻟﻸﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪k‬‬‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻏﻠﺏ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺟﺯء ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪5300K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺻﺎ ٍ‬‫ﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪7500K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺻﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ‬

‫‪O‬‬

‫‪6000K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﻣﻠﺑﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻳﻭﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪3000K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻧﺟﺳﺗﻳﻥ‬‫ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺄﺿﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻭﺳﻧﺕ‬‫>‬‫‪4000K‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪5500K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )ﺹ‪(56 .‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻭﻥ‬‫ﻟﻼﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬‫ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬‫‪/P/Q‬‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫‪ W/X‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫ﻣﺿﺎ ًء ﺑﻧﻭﻉ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺿﻭء ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ،INFO‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪CWB‬‬‫‪– 2000K‬‬‫‪14000K‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ ،[Color Creator‬ﻳﺟﺭﻱ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.AUTO‬‬‫‪55 AR‬‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬‫ﻗﺱ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳُﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻔﻳﺩًﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﻩ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺿﻭء ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [W] ،[Q] ،[P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [X‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪ 3 ،2 ،1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (4‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬‫‪.INFO‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻋﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫• ﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻸ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻅﻼﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻛﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ %‬ﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺳﺎﻁﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺗﻣًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﺧﻔﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]‪ [WB NG Retry‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻭﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﺳﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ‪) A‬ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪-‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬‫ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ‪ +‬ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬‫– ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ‪) G‬ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪-‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ(‬‫ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ‪ +‬ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬‫– ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬
‫‪G‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫‪-5‬‬‫‪+2‬‬‫‪WB Preview‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ .R‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ]> ‪) [All‬ﺹ‪.(105 .‬‬‫‪AR 56‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ) ُﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﺛﺑّﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪Focal Length‬‬‫‪Sensor Shift + Digital‬‬‫‪50‬‬‫‪OFF M-IS 1 M-IS‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪mm‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣ ًﺩﺩ ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬‫‪OFF‬‬‫‪Still-I.S. Off‬‬‫ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS1‬‬‫‪All Direction‬‬‫‪Shake I.S.‬‬‫ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS2‬‬‫‪Vertical Shake‬‬‫‪I.S.‬‬‫ﻳﻁﺑﻕ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ )‪ (Y‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS3‬‬‫‪Horizontal‬‬‫‪Shake I.S.‬‬‫ﻳﻁﺑﻕ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ )‪ (Z‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻓﻘﻳًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪Auto I.S.‬‬‫ﺗﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻭﺗﻁﺑﻕ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪OFF‬‬‫‪Movie-I.S. Off‬‬‫‪M-IS1‬‬‫‪All Direction‬‬‫‪Shake I.S.‬‬‫ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻼً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ )‪(VCM‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪M-IS2‬‬‫‪All Direction‬‬‫‪Shake I.S.‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ )‪ (VCM‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪(Four Thirds/Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪.Four Thirds‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ ،[Image Stabilizer‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ،INFO‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ 8‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻭ‪ 1000‬ﻣﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻣﺛﺑّﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻁ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻝ‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻡ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ [Image Stabilizer‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[OFF‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﻁﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﻁﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[S-IS AUTO‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ [S-IS1‬ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ‬‫]‪.[S-IS AUTO‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﺛﺑّﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪57 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺿﻐﻁﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪) j/Y‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ(‪.‬‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪j/Y‬‬‫‪Single‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪P‬‬
‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪Y12s Y2s‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪T‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪j/Y‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ(‪.‬‬‫‪T‬‬‫‪Sequential H‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ 10‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ )ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ( ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‬‫ﻭﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫‪Sequential L‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪ 12 Y12s‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ 5‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ )ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ( ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ]‪) [AF Mode‬ﺹ‪ (51 .‬ﻭ ]‪[AEL/AFL‬‬‫)ﺹ‪.(110 .‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻻً‪،‬‬‫ﻳﺿﻲء ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Y2s‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻭﻣﺽ‬‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪YC‬‬‫ﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ ،[Interval Time] ،[Frame] ،[Y Timer‬ﻭ‬‫]‪.[Every Frame AF‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩًﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ ،HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪.(r‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ [Every Frame AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[ON‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪♦S‬‬‫‪Anti-Shockz‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﺋﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺟﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ‪.(59 .‬‬‫‪♥S‬‬‫]♥[‪Silent‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬‫)ﺹ‪.(59 .‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪High Res Shot‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﺹ‪.(60 .‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.G‬‬‫‪AR 58‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪Single‬‬‫‪Yc‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺟﻡ ﻋﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ )‪(Anti-Shock z‬‬‫ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺟﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺫﻱ ﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻬﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣُﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ]‪ [Anti-Shockz‬ﻓﻲ‬‫‪ .X Shooting menu 2‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Off‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(95 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻙ ‪ ،S‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻙ ‪ ،T‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻻﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﻁﺎﻗﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺗﺑﺩﺃ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺛﺑّﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻘﻑ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺣﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪) j/Y‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ(‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ♦ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻘﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ )]♥[‪(Silent‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺻﺎﺭﻳﻊ‬‫ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﺋﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺟﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ )‪.(anti-shock‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ]]♥[‪ [Silent‬ﻓﻲ‬‫‪ .X Shooting menu 2‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Off‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(95 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪) j/Y‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ(‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ♥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ُﺗﻅﻠﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺣﻅﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﺷﻭﻫًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻌﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪59 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )‪(High Res Shot‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ]‪ [High Res Shot‬ﻓﻲ‬‫‪ .X Shooting menu 2‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Off‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ )ﺹ‪ .(95 .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪.(61 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪) j/Y‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ(‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ‪ h‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪ .h‬ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.LF‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،RAW+JPEG‬ﺗﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ "‪ (".ORI‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺩﻣﺟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‬‫ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺩﻣﺞ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺩﻫﻭﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ]‪ [Image Stabilizer‬ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩﻱ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺗﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]‪) [4:3‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ [16:9‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [3:2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [1:1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[3:4‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺩّﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﺹ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ؛ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﺹ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻝ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 60‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺏ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ(‪.‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺩّﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ‪ ،XN ،YN ،YF) JPEG‬ﻭ ‪ (WN‬ﻭ ‪ .RAW‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ‪ JPEG+RAW‬ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻛﻝ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ ‪ RAW‬ﻣﻊ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺿﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪ Y‬ﻭ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ (W‬ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )‪ SF‬ﻭ‬‫‪ F‬ﻭ‪ N‬ﻭ‪.(B‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻏﻳﺭ ‪ ،YF/YN/XN/WN‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫]‪) [K Set‬ﺹ‪ (105 .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ‪) High Res Shot‬ﺹ‪ ،(60 .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ LF‬ﻭ ‪.LF+RAW‬‬‫ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪RAW‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ )ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ "‪ (".ORF‬ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻧﺳﺦ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪JPEG‬‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪" v .‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ" )ﺹ‪(96 .‬‬‫‪61 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ(‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.n‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺩّﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪P‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪FHD F 60p‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪c 30p‬‬‫‪FHD N‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪MOV‬‬‫‪SF‬‬‫‪P FHD60pF FHD 60p‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‬‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪MOV FHD F 30p‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ )ﺹ‪(42 .‬‬‫‪MOVnFHD F 60p‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪1‬‬‫‪MOVnFHD SF 60p‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪2‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫‪MOVnFHD F 30p‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪3‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫‪MOVnFHD N 30p‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪4‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺑﻁﻲء‪/‬ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬‫)‪*(Full HD Fine 30p‬‬‫)‪*(Full HD Fine 60p‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫)‪*(Full HD Super Fine 60p‬‬‫)‪*(Full HD Fine 30p‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫)‪* *(Full HD Normal 30p‬‬‫‪3 1‬‬‫‪MOVnFHD F 30p‬‬‫)‪*(Full HD Fine 30p‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫)‪*(Motion JPEG ،720×1280‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪SD‬‬‫)‪*(Motion JPEG ،480×640‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬‫–‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬‫–‬‫*‪ 1‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ .MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 :‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺻﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻱ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ 29‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 3‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ‪ All-Intra‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻣُﺳﺟﻝ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﺃﻗﻝ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،PAL‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ 30p‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ‪ 25p‬ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ 60p‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ‪.50p‬‬‫• ﺣﺳﺏ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 62‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺯﻉ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻭﻳﺛﺑﺕ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻣﻛﻥٌ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻙ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪UNLOCK‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪ UNLOCK‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻓﻙ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،ON‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪.OFF‬‬‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ‪ON/OFF‬‬‫‪63 AR‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪Flash Mode‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺗﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ُﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪" v .‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ" )ﺹ‪(65 .‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﺿﻲء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪$‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺿﻲء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫!‪#!/‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ S‬ﻭ‬‫‪ ،M‬ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪#SLOW‬‬‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‬‫ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻓﺗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪!SLOW‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‪/‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬‫ﻳﺿﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪.‬‬‫‪/#SLOW2‬‬‫‪2nd‬‬‫‪Curtain‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‬‫ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺧﻠﻑ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪،#FULL‬‬‫‪ #1/4‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬‫ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻳﻥ ﻳﻔﺿﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬‫‪ ،INFO‬ﻓﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ]!‪) #!/‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء([‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ]!‪) #!/‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء([ ﺑﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1/250‬ﺙ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻝء‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻣﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 64‬‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪A/P‬‬‫‪#AUTO‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫!‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء(‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء‬‫‪$‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫!‬‫‪SLOW‬‬‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ )ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء(‬‫‪#SLOW‬‬‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‬‫‪SLOW2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬‫‪#‬‬‫‪M/S‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬‫‪ 30‬ﺙ –‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺙ*‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء‬‫!‪#‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء‬‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء(‬‫‪$‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪k‬‬‫‪2nd-C‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻝء‪/‬ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻁﻼﻗﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬‫‪ 1/30‬ﺙ –‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺙ*‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻁﻼﻗﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫‪ 60‬ﺙ –‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺙ*‬‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬‫‪ 60‬ﺙ –‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺙ*‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬‫‪ 60‬ﺙ –‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺙ*‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ‪ $ ،#AUTO‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪.A‬‬‫* ‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻅﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺋﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪،‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻺﺧﺭﺍﺝ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪17mm f1.8‬‬‫ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻧﺻﻭﻉ ﺣﺎﻓﻲ‬‫‪ 0.25‬ﻡ‬‫‪25mm f1.8‬‬‫‪ 0.25‬ﻡ‬‫‪45mm f1.8‬‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﻡ‬‫‪12 – 50mm EZ‬‬‫‪ 0.35‬ﻡ‬‫‪12 – 40mm PRO‬‬‫‪ 0.6‬ﻡ‬‫‪ 0.3‬ﻡ )ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ 16 :‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ(‬‫‪40 – 150mm‬‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﻡ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﻳﻠﻭﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﻁﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ M‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ‪ f‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫‪65 AR‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﺿﺎ ًء ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺭﺿًﺎ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪1023‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻳﺱ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪.MANUAL‬‬‫• ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻁﺭﺃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﻧﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﻸﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪(Button Function‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﺯﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ‪.cCustom Menu S‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺳﻧﺎﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺯﺭ ﻵﺧﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Function‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬‫]‪[zFunction] / 1*[RFunction] / [ZFunction] / [YFunction] / [VFunction] / [UFunction‬‬‫‪/ 4*[mFunction] / (3*[P] / 2*[Direct Function]) [nFunction] / [GFunction] / [IFunction] /‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫]‪*[lFunction] / 4*[nFunction‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻳﻌﻳّﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ‪.HIGF‬‬‫*‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 4‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﺯﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (HLD-8‬ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻊ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 5‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﺯﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 66‬‬‫‪k ISO / j WB‬‬‫‪k WB / j ISO‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬‫]‪ .[AEL/AFL‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ ،AEL‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ‬‫‪ u‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪R REC‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪) z‬ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ(‬‫ﺗﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺃﺟﻝ ]‪ [zLock‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪) k‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬‫ﺗﻘﻳﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ )ﺹ‪.(56 .‬‬‫‪) P‬ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪P Home‬‬‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅ‬‫ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪) [P Set Home‬ﺹ‪ .(100 .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺳﺎﺑ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪RAWK‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫‪(Test Picture) K TEST‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Myset1 – Myset4‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Myset‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ‬‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪I/H‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﻼﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ I‬ﺃﻭ ‪ H‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ I‬ﻭ ‪ H‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ﺳﻭﻑ‬‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻌﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪) b‬ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻭﻧﻔﺭﺗﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪) D‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﺣﺭﻑ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﺣﺭﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪) a‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪F‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪67 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Peaking‬‬‫ﻛﻝ ﺿﻐﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪/‬ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬‫‪ ،Peaking‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ ،Peaking‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬‫‪.INFO‬‬‫‪AF Stop‬‬‫ﻳﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪j/Y‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺷ ّﻐﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ BKT‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Multi Function‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻻﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ*‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺩﻋﺎﺓ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪" v .‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ" )ﺹ‪(68 .‬‬‫‪BKT‬‬‫‪) GLock‬ﻗﻔﻝ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬‫‪Electronic Zoom‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ ﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪) u‬ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ‪/‬ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻭﻡ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ‪.EVF‬‬‫‪V Level Disp‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ [Style 1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Style 2‬ﻓﻲ ]‪Built-in‬‬‫‪.[EVF Style‬‬‫* ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪/ISO sensitivity) e ،(Color Creator) c ،(Highlight&Shadow Control) b :‬‬‫‪(Image Aspect) d ،(Magnify) a ،(ISO sensitivity /White balance) f ،(White balance‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ )‪(Multi Function‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﻠﺯﺭ ‪.Fn2‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‬‫ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪Highlight&Shadow Control‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪AR 68‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺭّ ﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪ [a‬ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﺯﺭ ‪Fn2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Q/Fn2‬‬‫‪Fn2‬‬‫‪Fn2‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200 1023‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200 1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200 1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬‫‪Fn2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﺯﺭ ‪Fn2‬‬‫‪500‬‬‫‪HI LIGHT‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪AUTO LOW 200‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪320‬‬‫‪250‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪Recommend‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫࠻࡯ࠝ‪WB‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪SHADOW‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪1023‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪250 F5.6 0.0‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ‪Color Creator‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬‫‪) b‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ( )ﺹ‪(52 .‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪/ISO‬‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪(r‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪(o‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ‬‫‪) (Color Creator) c‬ﺹ‪(52 .‬‬‫ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺑﻊ‬‫‪) e‬ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪/ISO‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(* )ﺹ‪(55 ،54 .‬‬‫ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫‪) f‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪/‬ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪) *(ISO‬ﺹ‪(55 ،54 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫‪) (Super Spot AF) a‬ﺹ‪(50 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬‫‪) (Image Aspect) d‬ﺹ‪(60 .‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫* ﺍﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪) [Multi Function Settings‬ﺹ‪.(103 .‬‬‫‪69 AR‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ )ﺹ‪.(69 .‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪P‬‬
‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬

‫‪C‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫‪j‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪h‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪i-Enhance‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪Vivid‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Z‬‬‫‪Muted‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻁﻔﺄﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪a‬‬‫‪Portrait‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪J‬‬‫‪Monotone‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺃﺳﻭﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪K‬‬‫‪Custom‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﺟّ ﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪e-Portrait‬‬‫ﻳُﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻠﻣﺱ ﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﻟﻠﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪Color Creator‬‬‫ﻳُﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪) Color Creator‬ﺹ‪.(52 .‬‬‫‪Soft Focus k‬‬‫‪Pale&Light Color l‬‬‫‪Light Tone m‬‬‫‪Grainy Film n‬‬‫‪Pin Hole o‬‬‫‪Diorama s‬‬‫‪Cross Process t‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ" )ﺹ‪(30 .‬‬‫‪Gentle Sepia u‬‬‫‪Dramatic Tone v‬‬‫‪Key Line Y‬‬‫‪Watercolor Z‬‬‫‪Vintage G‬‬‫‪*Partial Color H‬‬‫‪AR 70‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﺛﻳﺭ ﻟﻺﻋﺟﺎﺏ ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪Pop Art j‬‬‫*‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ Partial Color‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ ،HI‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ(‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Picture Mode‬ﺹ‪ ،(70 .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﻭﺣﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ )ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ‪.‬‬‫‪Sharpness‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Picture Mode‬ﺹ‪ ،(70 .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﻩ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Contrast‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺑﻊ(‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Picture Mode‬ﺹ‪ ،(70 .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﻩ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Saturation‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺑﻊ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪71 AR‬‬‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ(‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Picture Mode‬ﺹ‪ ،(70 .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Gradation‬‬‫ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪AUTO:Auto‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻟﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻣﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻻً ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪NORM:Normal‬‬‫ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ [Normal‬ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪HIGH:High Key‬‬‫ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‪.‬‬‫‪LOW:Low Key‬‬‫ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )‪(B&W Filter‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Picture Mode‬ﺹ‪ ،(70 .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻧﺷﺊ ﻫﺫﺍ‬‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﻔﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻭﺗﻐﻣﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻣﻝ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ]‪.[Picture Mode‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Monotone‬ﺛﻡ ]‪.[B&W Filter‬‬‫‪B&W Filter‬‬‫‪J Monotone‬‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪N‬‬

‫‪N‬‬

‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪AR 72‬‬‫‪N:Neutral‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪Ye:Yellow‬‬‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺳﺣﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻣﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Or:Orange‬‬‫ﻳﺭﻛﺯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﻔﻳﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺭﻭﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪R:Red‬‬‫ﻳﺭﻛﺯ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻣﺯﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪G:Green‬‬‫ﻳﺭﻛﺯ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻔﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﺿﺭﺍء‪.‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )‪(Pict. Tone‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ]‪) [Picture Mode‬ﺹ‪.(70 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ]‪.[Picture Mode‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Monotone‬ﺛﻡ ]‪.[Pict. Tone‬‬‫‪Pict. Tone‬‬‫‪J Monotone‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪N:Neutral‬‬‫‪S:Sepia‬‬‫ﺑﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻥ‬‫‪B:Blue‬‬‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‬‫‪P:Purple‬‬‫ﺃﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻳﺔ‬‫‪G:Green‬‬‫ﺧﺿﺭﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )‪(Color Space‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ [Color Space‬ﻓﻲ ‪.c Custom Menu X‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ‪.Color Space‬‬‫‪Color Space‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪Color Space‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪sRGB‬‬‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﺟﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻭﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﻳﺔ )‪.(IEC‬‬‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ]‪ [sRGB‬ﻛﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪AdobeRGB‬‬‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ‪.Adobe Systems‬‬‫ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﺦ ﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪73 AR‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،n‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫‪R‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Movie R On‬‬‫‪OFF ON‬‬‫‪ON‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬‫ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ [AF Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [S-AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(Diorama) s‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[OFF‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪.O‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪ n‬ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،n‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ،Q‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪Program Auto‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪AR 74‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (o‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ 1/30‬ﺙ ﻭ ‪ 1/8000‬ﺙ‪.‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (o‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ 1/30‬ﺙ ﻭ ‪ 1/8000‬ﺙ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺗﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ISO 200‬ﻭ‪6400‬؛ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺷﺩﻳﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ]‪ [C-AF‬ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻥ ﻓﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ 10‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪75 AR‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﺑﺳﻁ‬‫‪5 6 7 89‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪34‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫‪×10‬‬

‫‪0‬‬
‫‪a‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪3D 4:3 L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪e‬‬‫‪d c b‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﻣﻝ‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪ij‬‬

‫‪k‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪p‬‬
‫‪q‬‬

‫‪F5.6‬‬‫‪45mm‬‬‫‪g‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪250‬‬

‫‪f‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪+2.0‬‬‫‪+1.0‬‬‫‪G+4‬‬‫‪Adobe‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪A+4‬‬‫‪ISO 400‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪4608×3456‬‬‫‪3D 4:3 L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪u tsr‬‬‫‪AR 76‬‬‫‪v‬‬

‫‪3‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫‪ 1‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪17 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ‪ ........‬ﺹ‪123–118 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ .........GPS‬ﺹ‪121 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ‪ ..........................Eye-Fi‬ﺹ‪109 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺣﺟﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ .................................‬ﺹ‪129 .‬‬‫‪ .................................. Share order 6‬ﺹ‪82 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪82 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪ ..............................................‬ﺹ‪81 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪82 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ‪ ........................................‬ﺹ‪106 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬‫‪ b‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪87 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ........................................ 3D‬ﺹ‪28 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ‬‫‪ ........................... PHOTO STORY‬ﺹ‪33 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪18 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ..........................‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫‪ g‬ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪48 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪40 – 23 .‬‬‫‪ i‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ‪ .................................‬ﺹ‪47 .‬‬‫‪ j‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ‪ ...........................‬ﺹ‪37 – 34 .‬‬‫‪ k‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪ ..........................‬ﺹ‪37 – 34 .‬‬‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪137 .‬‬‫‪ m‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪66 .‬‬‫‪ n‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ‪ ....................‬ﺹ‪56 .‬‬‫‪ o‬ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪ ...................................‬ﺹ‪106 .‬‬‫‪ p‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ .....................................‬ﺹ‪70 .‬‬‫‪ q‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪116 .‬‬‫‪ r‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪105 .‬‬‫‪ s‬ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ..................................... ISO‬ﺹ‪54 .‬‬‫‪ t‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪55 .‬‬‫‪ u‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪ .......................................‬ﺹ‪54 .‬‬‫‪ v‬ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ....................................‬ﺹ‪22 .‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﺑﺳﻁ‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪F5.6‬‬‫‪250‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪45mm‬‬‫‪+2.0‬‬‫‪G±10‬‬‫‪Adobe‬‬‫‪A±10‬‬‫‪ISO 400‬‬‫‪±0.0‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪4032×3024‬‬‫‪L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﻣﻝ‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‬‫‪77 AR‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.q‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (r‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪100-0004‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪q‬‬‫‪AR 78‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪(o‬‬‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ )‪/(p‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ )‪(q‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪(r‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ )‪/(t‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ )‪(s‬‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺭﺏ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ‬‫)‪(HIGF‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ )‪/(I‬ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ )‪/(H‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )‪(GF‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺭﺏ‪ :‬ﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ )‪ (I‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ )‪ (H‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺭﺏ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪/My Clips/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‪ :‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫‪Fn1‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪Fn1‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Fn1‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫‪H‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪(82 .‬‬‫‪Fn2‬‬‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ )ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ(‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬‫• ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ G‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬‫‪ My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻣﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ a‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬

‫‪q‬‬
‫‪p‬‬

‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬‫‪p‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 12:12 MOV‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪*My Clips‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Sat‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪p‬‬‫‪Fri‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪9‬‬

‫‪Thu‬‬‫‪Wed‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪17‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫‪23‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪19‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬

‫‪Q‬‬
‫*‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ‪ My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻫﻧﺎ )ﺹ‪.(42 .‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 11:23 MOV‬‬‫‪c 11:24 MOV‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪2015.1‬‬‫‪Tue‬‬‫‪Mon‬‬‫‪Sun‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺭﺏ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ U‬ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ G‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬

‫‪p‬‬

‫‪p‬‬

‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪14x‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ×‪2‬‬‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ×‪14‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺭﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ]‪ [Rotate‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ F‬ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ G‬ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ؛ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪79 AR‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬‫ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ]‪.[m‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Print Order‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪Start‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻟﺑﺩء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪BGM‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Joy‬ﺃﻭ ﺣﻭّ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫‪Slide‬‬‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪Movie Interval‬‬‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺷﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪10‬‬‫ٍ‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Full‬ﻟﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻭ]‪ [Short‬ﻟﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء‬‫ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺗﺎﺣﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪Slide Interval‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ]‪ [Start‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ GF‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ HI‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ]‪ [Joy‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺟّ ﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Olympus‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪[Joy‬‬‫ﻣﻥ ]‪ [BGM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ .I‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪http://support.olympus-imaging.com/bgmdownload/‬‬‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ F‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪00:00:02/00:00:14‬‬‫‪AR 80‬‬‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ‬‫]‪ [Play Movie‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺟﻳﻊ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.H/I‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ F‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HI‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (r‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬‫‪ MENU‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪Movie‬‬‫‪Play Movie‬‬‫‪Share Order‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Play from Beginning‬ﻳﻌﻳﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻼ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‬‫ﻳﻌﻳﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫]‪:[Play Movie‬‬‫ﻳﺣﺫﻑ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻧﻘﺳﻡ‬‫]‪:[Delete entire n‬‬‫ﻳﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫]‪:[Erase‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻧﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﻏﻳﺭﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [0‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ ،Q‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪F‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪) 0‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬‫‪ F‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ )]‪،[0] ،[Share Order Selected‬‬‫]‪) "([Erase Selected‬ﺹ‪(82 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪) 0‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ(‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ .D‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪) [Quick Erase] v .‬ﺹ‪(106 .‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪D‬‬‫‪Yes‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪81 AR‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻣﺭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )]‪([Share Order‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺃﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [Share Order‬ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،Q‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ F‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺃﻣﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ‪ .h‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻣﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ F‬ﺃﻭ ‪.G‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺃﻣﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪" v .‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ‬‫)]‪) "([Erase Selected] ،[0] ،[Share Order Selected‬ﺹ‪" ،(82 .‬ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ"‬‫)ﺹ‪(120 .‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫‪3‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ‪ Share Order‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 200‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪ H) Motion JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(I‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ )]‪([Erase Selected] ،[0] ،[Share Order Selected‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ]‪ ،[0] ،[Share Order Selected‬ﺃﻭ‬‫]‪.[Erase Selected‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ H‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺳﻲ )ﺹ‪ (79 .‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ؛ ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪ v‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ H‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ]‪،[0] ،[Share Order Selected‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ]‪.[Erase Selected‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺗﻲ )ﻣﺩﺗﻪ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫‪AR 82‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺗﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻲ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [R‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪.[No‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪JPEG Edit‬‬‫‪Add to My Clips‬‬‫‪Share Order‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪Rotate‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [R Start‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪.H‬‬‫• ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Erase‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.3‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫‪R Start‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‬‫• ﺣﺭﻙ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﻭ ‪.P‬‬‫• ﻣﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪ P‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻣﻲ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ‪.My Clips‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻬﺭﺳﻲ‪/My Clips/‬ﺗﻘﻭﻳﻣﻲ‬‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ‬‫• ﻣﺭﺭ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ Q‬ﺃﻭ ‪ R‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ‪ R‬ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﻧﺩﺋﺫ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ‬‫ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬‫‪H‬‬‫ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺟﺗﻣﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻣﺭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )]‪) "([Share Order‬ﺹ‪(82 .‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫ﻳﺣﻣﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻅﺎﻓﺭﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺷﻳﺎء ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬‫‪83 AR‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬‫‪W‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ(‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪X‬‬

‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ‬‫‪q‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﻣﻳﻕ‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺹ‪*(100 .‬‬‫‪d‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬‫* ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪j /Y/‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪MENU‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ً ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ ﻷﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Keystone Comp.‬‬‫]♥[ ‪Anti-Shock [♦]/Silent‬‬‫‪High Res Shot‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪Q‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(152 .‬‬‫‪AR 84‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Keystone Comp.‬‬‫]♥[ ‪Anti-Shock [♦]/Silent‬‬‫‪High Res Shot‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪Shooting Menu 2/Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪) Card Setup‬ﺹ‪(85 .‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪) Reset/Myset‬ﺹ‪(86 .‬‬‫‪) Picture Mode‬ﺹ‪(87 .‬‬‫‪) K‬ﺹ‪(87 .‬‬‫‪) Image Aspect‬ﺹ‪(60 .‬‬‫‪) Digital Tele-converter‬ﺹ‪(88 .‬‬‫‪/Time Lapse Settings) j/Y/i‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ( )ﺹ‪(89 ،88 ،58 .‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪) Bracketing X‬ﺹ‪(90 .‬‬‫‪) HDR‬ﺹ‪(53 .‬‬‫‪) Multiple Exposure‬ﺹ‪(93 .‬‬‫‪) Keystone Comp.‬ﺹ‪(94 .‬‬‫]♥[‪) Anti-Shock z/Silent‬ﺹ‪(95 .‬‬‫‪) High Res Shot‬ﺹ‪(95 .‬‬‫‪) # RC Mode‬ﺹ‪(95 .‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪j /Y/‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Card Setup‬‬‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺣﺎﺳﺏ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻻ ﺗﺯﺍﻝ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪" v .‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪(132 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ]‪ [Format‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Card Setup‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪All Erase‬‬‫‪Format‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫• ﺗﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪(Card Setup‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Card Setup‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ]‪ [All Erase‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪All Erase‬‬‫‪Format‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪85 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ )‪(Reset‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Reset/Myset‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ]‪ [Reset‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻅﻠﻝ ]‪ [Reset‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ I‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻅﻠﻝ ]‪[Full‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪(152 .‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Reset‬‬‫‪Myset1‬‬‫‪Myset2‬‬‫‪Myset3‬‬‫‪Myset4‬‬‫‪Basic‬‬‫‪No Data‬‬‫‪No Data‬‬‫‪No Data‬‬‫‪No Data‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻼﺕ )‪(Myset‬‬‫ﺣﻔﻅ ‪Myset‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺧﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪،A ،P‬‬‫‪ ،S‬ﻭ ‪.M‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Reset/Myset‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ )]‪ ([Myset1]–[Myset4‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]‪ [Set‬ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ )]‪ ([Myset1]–[Myset4‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [Set‬ﻣﺭﺓ‬‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪.[Reset‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ‪" v Myset‬ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ" )ﺹ‪(152 .‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪Myset‬‬‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ‪.Myset‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Reset/Myset‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺑﺔ )]‪ ([Myset1]–[Myset4‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Basic‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Reset‬‬‫‪Myset1‬‬‫‪Myset2‬‬‫‪Myset3‬‬‫‪Myset4‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ‪ MySet‬ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ‪ MySet‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻫﺎ ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣ ّ‬‫ُﺧﺯﻥ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ‪ MySet‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ART‬ﺃﻭ ‪ A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 86‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ )‪(Picture Mode‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪[Picture Mode‬‬‫)ﺹ‪ .(70 .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Picture Mode‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪j /Y /‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ I‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪i-a‬‬

‫‪J‬‬

‫‪K‬‬

‫‪v‬‬

‫‪Contrast‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫‪Sharpness‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫‪Saturation‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫‪Gradation‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫ﺹ‪72 .‬‬‫‪ .i-Enhance) Effect‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ(‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪(Monotone) B&W Filter‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫ﺹ‪72 .‬‬‫‪(Monotone) Pict. Tone‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫ﺹ‪73 .‬‬

‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪ %‬ﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪) [Picture Mode Settings] v‬ﺹ‪(102 .‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ]‪.[Normal‬‬‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪(K‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ]‪ [K‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪" v .‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(" )ﺹ‪" ،(61 .‬ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ(" )ﺹ‪(62 .‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺔ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ]‪ [X‬ﻭ ]‪ [W‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪،[K Set] .JPEG‬‬‫]‪" v [Pixel Count‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ" )ﺹ‪(116 .‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﻟﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﻥ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻁﻲء‪/‬ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪) "Movie Specification Settings" v‬ﺹ‪(108 .‬‬‫‪87 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )‪(Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻭﻧﻔﺭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺑﻘﺩﺭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ×‪ 2‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ [Digital Tele-converter‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻌﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 88‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ J‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ ،w ،f ،s ،T‬ﺃﻭ ‪ m‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫‪.SCN‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [On‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫• ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ]‪[Movie Effect‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻧﺎﻗﺹ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )‪(j/Y‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [j/Y/i‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [j/Y‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.I‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪j /Y /‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪) [YC‬ﻣﺧﺻﺹ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Frame‬‬‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Y Timer‬‬‫ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﻌﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Interval Time‬‬‫ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Every Frame AF‬‬‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ )‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻛﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.M/S/A/P‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ]‪ [Time Lapse Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.I‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ I‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Frame‬‬‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Start Waiting Time‬‬‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Interval Time‬‬‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Time Lapse Movie‬‬‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺻﻳﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Off‬ﻳﺳﺟﻝ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[On‬ﻳﺳﺟﻝ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﻳﻧﺷﺊ ﻭﻳﺳﺟﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻣًﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺩًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﻲ ]‪ [(HD) Motion JPEG‬ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ 10‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ .AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪.MF‬‬‫• ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ]‪ [Rec View‬ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ‪ 31‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻭﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﺩﺓ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻁﻔﺄﺓ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [j/Y/i‬ﻓﻲ ‪.W Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪j /Y /‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [C-AF‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[C-AF+TR‬ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[S-AF‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻳﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺯﺭ ‪ ،MENU‬ﺯﺭ ‪ ،q‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪.USB‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻑٍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء‪.‬‬‫‪89 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻧﻭﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ(‬‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ "ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ "ﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ" ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Bracketing‬ﻓﻲ ‪ X Shooting Menu 2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ I‬ﻭﺣﺩّﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪HDR‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Keystone Comp.‬‬‫]♥[ ‪Anti-Shock [♦]/Silent‬‬‫‪High Res Shot‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 90‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ‪ t‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ ،I‬ﺣﺩّﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،2‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪) WB BKT‬ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ )ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬‫ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺎ ً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ S ،A ،P‬ﻭ ‪.M‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﻭﻳﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 6‬ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭﻳﻥ‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪) A – B‬ﻣﺯﺭﻕ – ﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ( ﻭ‪) G – M‬ﺃﺣﻣﺭ – ﻣﺧﺿﺭ(‪.‬‬‫‪A-B‬‬‫‪G-M‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬‫‪3f 4Step‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪3f 4Step‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪) FL BKT‬ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﻧﻭﻳﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ )ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﻠﺑﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﺟﺎﺑﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺛﺔ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ؛ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪ t‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪.[EV Step‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.3EV‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ" )ﺹ‪(100 .‬‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪3f 1.0EV -‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬‫‪) AE BKT‬ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ُﺗﻐﻳّﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ 0.3 EV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.7 EV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .1.0 EV‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻛﻠﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻛﻠﻳًﺎ‪ :‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﺑﻳﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺑﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ 2 :‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻭ ‪7‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪ t‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻧﻭﻳﻊ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪2f 0.3EV‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ )ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (P‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ )ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻌﻳﻥ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ (M‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪2f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪2f 1.0EV -‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(S‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.3EV -‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪3f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪3f 1.0EV‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪.[EV Step‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ" )ﺹ‪(100 .‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪91 AR‬‬‫‪) ISO BKT‬ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬‫ُﺗﻐﻳّﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ‬‫‪ 0.3 EV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.7 EV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .1.0 EV‬ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﻠﺑﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺑﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻟﺛﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪.[ISO Step‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ" )ﺹ‪(100 .‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.3EV‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪3f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪3f 1.0EV -‬‬‫]‪" v .[ISO-Auto Set‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ" )ﺹ‪(100 .‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 92‬‬‫‪) ART BKT‬ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ‪(ART‬‬‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬‫ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻓﻧﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ART BKT‬ﻭ ‪ WB BKT‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Pop Art‬‬‫‪Soft Focus‬‬‫‪Pale&Light Color‬‬‫‪Light Tone‬‬‫‪Grainy Film‬‬‫‪Pin Hole‬‬‫‪Diorama‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﺎﺕ ﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ(‬‫ﺳﺟﱢ ﻝ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﺎﺕ ﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪Frame‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.[2f‬‬‫‪Auto Gain‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪1/2‬‬‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Overlay‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﺎﺕ ﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ‬‫ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Frame‬‬‫‪Auto Gain‬‬‫‪Overlay‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ a‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺳﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ a‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ D‬ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻛﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻟﺗﺄﻁﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ %‬ﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Multiple Exposure‬ﻓﻲ ‪.X Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫• ﻟﻣﺭﺍﻛﺑﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪ :‬ﺣﺩﺩ ‪ RAW‬ﻟـ ]‪ [K‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ [Overlay‬ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪" v :RAW‬ﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ" )ﺹ‪(98 .‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻥ ﺗﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ [Overlay‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻵﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪/q‬ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪/MENU‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﻳﺭ ‪،A ،P‬‬‫‪/M ،S‬ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ ،[Overlay‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺻﻳﻐﺔ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺍﻛﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺻﻧﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪93 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﻭﺭ )‪(Keystone Comp.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻣﺑﻧﻰ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﺗﻌﻣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬‫ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪.M/S/A/P‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ [Keystone Comp.‬ﻓﻲ‬‫‪.X Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪18 mm‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻝ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﺣﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪INFO‬‬‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﺣﺭﻑ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﺣﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﺣﺭﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﺣﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Off‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ]‪ [Keystone Comp.‬ﻓﻲ ‪.X Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ]‪) D‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺷﺑﻪ ﻣﻧﺣﺭﻑ([ )ﺹ‪ (67 .‬ﻟﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ ،[Button Function‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW + JPEG‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ )‪ i ،h ،g‬ﺃﻭ‬‫‪ (j‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻷﻣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪:‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺩﺭﺝ‪/HDR/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‪/digital tele-converter/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪/‬ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫]‪ [C-AF‬ﻭ ]‪/full-time AF/[C-AF+TR‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ]‪ [e-Portrait‬ﻭ ‪/ART‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪/‬‬‫‪/peaking‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻟـ ]‪ ،[Image Stabilizer‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪ Micro Four Thirds‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،Four Thirds‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﻭﻻً ﺑﺅﺭﻳًﺎ ﻣﻌﻳ ًﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫]‪) [Image Stabilizer‬ﺹ‪.(57 .‬‬‫‪AR 94‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ )]♥[‪(Anti-Shockz/Silent‬‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ‪.(58 .‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪Anti-Shockz‬‬‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ )‪ .(anti-shock‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ .[Off‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ‬‫ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺟﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ )ﺹ‪ (58 .‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ‪.(58 .‬‬‫]♥[‪Silent‬‬‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ♥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫]♥[‪Noise Reduction‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )‪(High Res Shot) (hi-res shot‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ‪ ،hi-res shot‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪ h‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬‫)ﺹ‪.(58 .‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]]♥[‪ [Anti-Shockz/Silent‬ﻓﻲ ‪.X Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [High Res Shot‬ﻓﻲ ‪.X Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪High Res Shot‬‬‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪ h‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪،hi-res shot‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫‪Charge Time#‬‬‫ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﺏ ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭﻩ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﻛﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻏﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪" v .‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ" )ﺹ‪(141 .‬‬‫‪95 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫‪) m‬ﺹ‪(80 .‬‬‫‪Playback Menu‬‬‫‪) R‬ﺹ‪(96 .‬‬‫‪) Edit‬ﺹ‪(96 .‬‬‫‪) Print Order‬ﺹ‪(129 .‬‬‫‪) Reset Protect‬ﺹ‪(98 .‬‬‫‪) Connection to Smartphone‬ﺹ‪(119 .‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪Edit‬‬‫‪Print Order‬‬‫‪Reset Protect‬‬‫‪Connection to Smartphone‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻠﺗﻔﺔ )‪(R‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻟﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬‫ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﺻﻭﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Edit‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ q Playback Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ [Sel. Image‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [RAW Data Edit‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [JPEG Edit‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ‬‫‪ .JPEG‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ ،RAW+JPEG‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ]‪ [RAW Data Edit‬ﻭ‬‫]‪ .[JPEG Edit‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [RAW Data Edit‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [JPEG Edit‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW‬ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ً ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫]‪[Current‬‬‫‪RAW Data‬‬‫‪Edit‬‬‫]‪[Custom1‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫]‪[Custom2‬‬‫‪AR 96‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬‫]‪ :[Shadow Adj‬ﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺢ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻥ ﻣُﺿﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻑ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Redeye Fix‬ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[P‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (r‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (o‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺫﻳﺏ ﻭ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺫﻳﺏ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Aspect‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪) 4:3‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ( ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [3:2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [16:9‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [1:1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ .[3:4‬ﺑﻌﺩ‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺫﻳﺏ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Black & White‬ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Sepia‬ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺑﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻥ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Saturation‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Q‬ﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1280 × 960‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 640 × 480‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .320 × 240‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻏﻳﺭ ‪) 4:3‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[e-Portrait‬ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬

‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ‪.PHOTO STORY‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻭﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺗﻳﺔ‪:‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﺟﻳﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ )]‪ ،([Q‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺃﺻﻼً‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﻳﻥ ]‪ [P‬ﻭ]‪ [Aspect‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪) 4:3‬ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ [Picture Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[ART‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ]‪ [Color Space‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[sRGB‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬‫‪JPEG Edit‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪O‬‬‫‪97 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺭﺍﻛﺑﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ‬‫]‪(.[YN+RAW‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ [Image Overlay‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Image Overlay‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻙ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،3‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Edit‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ q Playback Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻻﻛﺗﺳﺎﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪Image Overlay‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻻﻛﺗﺳﺎﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻻﻛﺗﺳﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ‪ .2.0 – 0.1‬ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪×0.5‬‬‫‪×1.5‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .Q‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ؛ ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ %‬ﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ]‪ [Image Overlay‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺗﻲ )ﻣﺩﺗﻪ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ]‪ [R‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(82 .‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪AR 98‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Reset Protect‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.q Playback Menu‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪×0.3‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Setup Menu‬‬‫‪--.--.-- --:-‬‬‫‪English‬‬‫‪j±0 k±0‬‬‫‪0.5sec‬‬

‫‪X‬‬
‫‪W‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Rec View‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫‪c Menu Display‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬

‫‪v‬‬

‫‪X‬‬
‫)ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ(‬‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫)ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ ‪ English‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫)ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﻳﻥ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‬‫‪) j‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ( ﺃﻭ ‪) k‬ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ( ﻭ ‪GF‬‬‫ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫]‪ [Natural‬ﻭ ]‪.[Vivid‬‬‫‪Rec View‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻭﺭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻔﻳﺩًﺍ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻓﺣﺹ‬‫ﻭﺟﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁﺗﻬﺎ ًﺗﻭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻓﺣﺹ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[20sec] – [0.3sec‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺛﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Off‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[AUTOq‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻔﻳﺩًﺍ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺣﺻﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪122‬‬‫‪c Menu‬‬‫‪Display‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻛﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪k‬‬‫‪+1‬‬‫—‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪-2‬‬‫—‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Vivid‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫—‬
‫—‬

‫‪99 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪.c Custom Menu‬‬‫‪Custom Menu‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 100‬‬‫‪) AF/MF R‬ﺹ‪(100 .‬‬‫‪) Button/Dial/Lever S‬ﺹ‪(101 .‬‬‫‪) Release/j T‬ﺹ‪(101 .‬‬‫‪) Disp/8/PC U‬ﺹ‪(102 .‬‬‫‪) Exp/p/ISO V‬ﺹ‪(104 .‬‬‫‪) # Custom W‬ﺹ‪(105 .‬‬‫‪) K/Color/WB X‬ﺹ‪(105 .‬‬‫‪) Record/Erase Y‬ﺹ‪(106 .‬‬‫‪) Movie Z‬ﺹ‪(107 .‬‬‫‪) Built-In EVF b‬ﺹ‪(109 .‬‬‫‪) K Utility k‬ﺹ‪(109 .‬‬‫‪Custom Menu‬‬‫‪R AF/MF‬‬‫‪S Button/Dial/Lever‬‬‫‪T Release/j‬‬‫‪U Disp/8/PC‬‬‫‪V Exp/p/ISO‬‬‫‪W # Custom‬‬‫‪X K/Color/WB‬‬‫‪AF/MF R‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪R‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪AF Mode‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻁﺭﻕ‬‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫‪51‬‬‫‪Full-time AF‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺳﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺿﻐﻁﺔ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬‫‪.Four Thirds‬‬‫—‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪110‬‬‫‪Reset Lens‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Bulb/Time‬‬‫‪Focusing‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬‫)‪ .(MF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Focus Ring‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪MF Assist‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ‪ peaking‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪111‬‬‫‪P Set Home‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﻛﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻅﻬﺭ ‪p‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪AF Illuminat.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪I Face Priority‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺱ‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪49‬‬‫‪AF Area Pointer‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Button/Dial/Lever S‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫]‪،[YFunction] ،[VFunction] ،[UFunction‬‬‫]‪،[IFunction] ،[zFunction] ،[RFunction] ،[ZFunction‬‬‫]‪،[mFunction] ،[nFunction] ،[GFunction‬‬‫]‪[lFunction] ،[nFunction‬‬‫‪66‬‬‫‪Dial Function‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Dial Direction‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Mode Dial‬‬‫‪Function‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ MySet‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪) [Myset4] - [Myset1‬ﺹ‪ (86 .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪t Lever‬‬‫‪Function‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Opt. Grip Dial‬‬‫‪Func.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺑﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‬‫)‪ (HLD-8‬ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ ﻭﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪T‬‬

‫‪Release/j T‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪Rls Priority S‬‬‫‪Rls Priority C‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪111‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪) S-AF‬ﺹ‪ (51 .‬ﻭ ‪C-AF‬‬‫)ﺹ‪.(51 .‬‬‫—‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ]‪ [♥jL] ،[T] ،[S‬ﻭ ]‪ .[♥jH‬ﺗﻣﺛﻝ‬‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪59 ,58‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪Button Function‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪j L fps‬‬‫‪j H fps‬‬‫‪♥j L fps‬‬‫‪♥j H fps‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫ﻳُﻧﺷﻁ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪j Image‬‬‫‪Stabilization‬‬‫ﻳُﻧﺷﻁ‪/‬ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Half Way Rls‬‬‫‪With IS‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪) IS‬ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Lens I.S. Priority‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﻁﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ‬‫ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Release Lag-Time‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[Short‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻘﺻﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪*.‬‬‫—‬‫‪57‬‬‫—‬‫* ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻋﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻋﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﺩ‬‫ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺿﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﻫﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪101 AR‬‬‫‪Disp/8/PC U‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫]‪ :[HDMI Out‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ‬‫‪.HDMI‬‬‫]‪ :[HDMI Control‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬‫ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫‪112‬‬‫‪Video Out‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ )]‪ [NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ([PAL‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪112‬‬‫‪KControl‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪HDMI‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 102‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫‪/A/P‬‬‫‪M/S‬‬‫‪ART‬‬‫‪SCN‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪) Live SCP‬ﺹ‪(45 .‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪) Live Guide‬ﺹ‪(26 .‬‬

‫‪‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫‪Art Menu‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫‪‬‬

‫–‬

‫‪Scene Menu‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫‪‬‬

‫‪) Live Control‬ﺹ‪(46 .‬‬‫‪113‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪G/Info Settings‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫]‪ :[q Info‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[LV-Info‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[G Settings‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪،114‬‬‫‪115‬‬‫‪Displayed Grid‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [X] ،[y] ،[x] ،[w‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [x‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Histogram‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫]‪ :[Highlight‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Shadow‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪114‬‬‫‪Mode Guide‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪23‬‬‫‪Live View Boost‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺑﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[ON1‬ﻳﻌﻁﻲ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺳﻼﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[ON2‬ﻳﻌﻁﻲ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Frame Rate‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [High‬ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺄﺧﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻛﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Art LV Mode‬‬‫]‪ :[mode1‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode2‬ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﺿﻐﻁﺔ ﺟﺯﺋﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺳﻠﺱ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Disp/8/PC U‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Expand LV Dyn.‬‬‫‪Range‬‬‫]‪ [Expand LV Dyn. Range‬ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[S-OVF‬‬‫‪Flicker reduction‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻌﺎﺵ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻌﺎﺵ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪ ،[Auto‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [50Hz‬ﺃﻭ‬‫]‪ [60Hz‬ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪LV Close Up Mode‬‬‫]‪ :[mode1‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode2‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪50‬‬‫‪zLock‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Peaking Settings‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻭﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Backlit LCD‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪.[Hold‬‬‫—‬‫‪Sleep‬‬‫ﺳﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻭﻥ )ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Auto Power Off‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﻘﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪) 8‬ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺔ(‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻐﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪USB Mode‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Auto‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[0‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ [0] .‬ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ ،S ،A ،P‬ﻭ ‪.M‬‬‫‪http://support.olympus-imaging.com/oc1download/index/‬‬‫—‬‫‪Multi Function‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪Menu Recall‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ [Recall‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪173‬‬‫—‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫—‬
‫—‬

‫‪103 AR‬‬‫‪Exp/p/ISO V‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪EV Step‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Noise Reduct.‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Auto‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[On‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Off‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪.‬‬‫• ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪37‬‬‫‪Noise Filter‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫‪54‬‬‫‪ISO Step‬‬‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫—‬‫‪ISO-Auto Set‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪[Auto‬‬‫ﻟـ ‪.ISO‬‬‫]‪ :[High Limit‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Default‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪ISO-Auto‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪.[Auto] ISO‬‬‫]‪ :[P/A/S‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ ‪.M‬‬‫ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ ISO200‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪.M‬‬‫]‪ :[All‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Metering‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪54‬‬‫‪AEL Metering‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ‪.(111 .‬‬‫]‪ :[Auto‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Bulb/Time Timer‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺿﻭﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ Bulb/Time Monitor‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ [TIME] ،[BULB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[COMP‬‬‫‪Live Bulb‬‬‫‪Live Time‬‬‫‪Composite‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫‪AR 104‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪V‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﺳﺭﻱ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻔﻪ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬

‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬

‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻟﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ )ﺹ‪.(38 .‬‬‫—‬‫‪# Custom W‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪# X-Sync.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪115‬‬‫‪# Slow Limit‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪115‬‬‫‪w+F‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪66 ،47‬‬‫‪K/Color/WB X‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪K Set‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻥ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ‬‫ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﺩﻻﺕ ﻟﻠﺿﻐﻁ‪.‬‬‫‪ (1‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬‫)]‪ ([K4] - [K1‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬‫‪ GF‬ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪D Set‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪W SF‬‬‫‪W N‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪ (2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Y SF‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫‪61‬‬‫‪Pixel Count‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬‫‪Pixel Count‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪X‬‬

‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺄﺣﺟﺎﻡ ]‪ [X‬ﻭ]‪.[W‬‬‫‪ (1‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Xiddle‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[Wmall‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫‪Pixel Count‬‬‫‪2560×1920‬‬‫‪1280×960‬‬‫‪Xiddle‬‬‫‪Wmall‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪61‬‬‫‪ (2‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Shading Comp.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻁﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﺎﺑﻳﺏ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻁﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻣﺭﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪WB‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪55‬‬‫> ‪All‬‬‫]‪ :[All Set‬ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ‬‫ﻋﺩﺍ ]‪.[CWB‬‬‫]‪ :[All Reset‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ‬‫]‪ [CWB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.0‬‬‫—‬‫‪105 AR‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪K/Color/WB X‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪W Keep Warm‬‬‫‪Color‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫—‬‫‪#+WB‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﺽ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Color Space‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪AR 106‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ "ﺍﻟﺩﺍﻓﺋﺔ" ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺗﻭﻫﺟﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Record/Erase Y‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪X‬‬

‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬

‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪Quick Erase‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ D‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺳﻳﺣﺫﻑ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪RAW+JPEG Erase‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺗﺧﺎﺫﻩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬‫‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ )ﺹ‪.(81 .‬‬‫]‪ :[JPEG‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[RAW‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[RAW+JPEG‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻠﺗﺎ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺧﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺳﺦ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬‫]‪) [All Erase‬ﺹ‪.(85 .‬‬‫‪61‬‬‫‪File Name‬‬‫]‪ :[Auto‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺄﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Reset‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ 100‬ﻭﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﻥ‬‫‪ .0001‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Edit Filename‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺟﺯء ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪Pmdd‬‬‫‪Pmdd0000.jpg :sRGB‬‬‫‪mdd‬‬‫‪_mdd0000.jpg :Adobe RGB‬‬‫—‬‫‪Priority Set‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ )]‪ [Yes‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ([No‬ﻟﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪dpi Settings‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪Record/Erase Y‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪Copyright‬‬‫‪*Settings‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬

‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﺎﻟﻙ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺻﻝ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 63‬ﺣﺭ ًﻓﺎ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[.Copyright Info‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﺎﻟﻙ‬‫ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Exif‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Artist Name‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Copyright Name‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺎﻟﻙ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ (1‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺣﺭﻑ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‬‫‪.2‬‬‫‪05/63‬‬‫‪Copyright Name‬‬‫‪ABCDE‬‬‫‪! ” # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . /‬‬‫? > = < ; ‪0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 :‬‬‫‪I J K L M N O‬‬‫_ ] [ ‪P Q R S T U V W X Y Z‬‬‫‪a b c d e f g h i j k l m n END‬‬‫} { ‪o p q r s t u v w x y z‬‬‫‪@ A B C D E F G H‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Delete‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪Cancel‬‬‫* ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ OLYMPUS‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﺯﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪.[Copyright Settings‬‬‫ﻭﺳﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻧﺕ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Movie Z‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪Z‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪nMode‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪40‬‬‫‪Movie R‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺻﺎﻣﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪74‬‬‫‪ Recording Volume‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺫﺭﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‬‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺛﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪KVolume Limiter‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Wind Noise‬‬‫‪Reduction‬‬‫ﺧﻔﺽ ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪KPlug-in Power‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﻭﻗﻑ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﺣﺗﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪PCM Recorder K‬‬‫‪Link‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [On‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣُﺳﺟﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫ﻛﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼً ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻋﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Headphone‬‬‫‪Volume‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ ﺑﺣﺎﻣﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ HLD-8‬ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻊ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪140‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪ (2‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ]‪ [END‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺣﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ‪،2‬‬‫ﻅﻠﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.D‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪107 AR‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪Movie Z‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Time Code‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Time Code Mode‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪) [DF‬ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ( ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﺻﺣﺣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭ ]‪) [NDF‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ( ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺣﺣﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Count Up‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ (Rec run) [RR‬ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ‬‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭ ]‪ (Free run) [FR‬ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Starting Time‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Current Time‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻟﻺﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .00‬ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،00:00:00:00‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪.[Reset‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪.[Manual Input‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﻭ ‪Motion JPEG‬‬‫)‪ H‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(I‬‬‫—‬‫‪n Info Settings‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺃﺣﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪Movie‬‬‫‪Specification‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‪/‬ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ‬‫‪ SET1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .SET4‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﺹ‪.(62 .‬‬‫]‪ :[Image Size‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ ]‪ (Full HD) [FHD‬ﻭ ]‪.[HD‬‬‫]‪ :[Compression/Bit Rate‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ‬‫)‪.[N](Normal)/[F](Fine)/[SF](Super Fine)/[A-I](All-Intra‬‬‫—‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪AR 108‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪Z‬‬

‫‪Movie Effect‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.n‬‬‫‪40‬‬‫‪Movie+Photo‬‬‫‪Mode‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode1‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode2‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ‪ mode2‬ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‬‫ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﻭ ‪ H) Motion JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،(I‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.mode2‬‬‫‪41‬‬‫‪nShutter‬‬‫‪Function‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode1‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﺑﺩء ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬‫‪ ،mode2‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.R‬‬‫—‬

‫‪Built-In EVF b‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Built-in EVF Style‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪116‬‬‫‪V Info Settings‬‬‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺧﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻅﻠﻳﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [Style 1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Style 2‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ‬‫]‪.[Built-in EVF Style‬‬‫—‬‫‪V Displayed Grid‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ]‪ [w‬ﻭ]‪ [x‬ﻭ]‪ [y‬ﻭ]‪[X‬‬‫ﻭ]‪ .[x‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [Style 1‬ﺃﻭ‬‫]‪ [Style 2‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ]‪.[Built-in EVF Style‬‬‫—‬‫‪EVF Auto Switch‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻳﻧﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ u‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪EVF Adjust‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻭﺗﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ [EVF Auto Luminance‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]‪.[On‬‬‫—‬‫‪V Half Way Level‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ً‬‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ [Built-in EVF Style‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]‪ [Style 1‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[Style 2‬‬‫—‬‫‪K Utility k‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Pixel Mapping‬‬‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﺣﺹ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪151‬‬‫‪Exposure Shift‬‬‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‪،‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ )ﺹ‪.(47 .‬‬‫—‬‫‪: Warning‬‬‫‪Level‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ‪.8‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫‪: Battery‬‬‫‪Priority‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪Level Adjust‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Reset‬ﻳﻌﻳﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Adjust‬ﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ‪.0‬‬‫‪Touch Screen‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪*Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ُ .Eye-Fi‬ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬‫—‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫‪b‬‬‫‪139‬‬‫—‬‫* ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺭﺝ‬‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Off‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ .[Eye-Fi‬ﻻ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻟﻼﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ" ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪.Eye-Fi‬‬‫‪109 AR‬‬‫‪k‬‬‫‪K Utility k‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Electronic‬‬‫‪Zoom Speed‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪136‬‬‫‪Selfie Assist‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪116‬‬‫‪Quick Sleep‬‬‫‪Mode‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬‫]‪ [Release Lag-Time‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Short‬‬‫—‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫]‪[AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪S-AF AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ‬‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ‪ AEL/AFL‬ﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫‪AEL/S-AF‬‬‫‪Exposure‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪Half Way‬‬‫‪Fully‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪AFL‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﺿﻐﻁ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪AR 110‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﺿﻐﻁ ﻛﻠﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪mode2‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫–‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫–‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫ﺑﺩء ‪C-AF‬‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪mode2‬‬‫ﺑﺩء ‪C-AF‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫–‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫–‬‫ﺑﺩء ‪C-AF‬‬‫–‬‫‪mode4‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫ﺑﺩء ‪C-AF‬‬‫–‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫‪mode2‬‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫–‬

‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻝ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫–‬‫‪MF Assist‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪R‬‬

‫]‪[MF Assist‬‬‫ﻫﻲ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪ .MF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺗﻡ‬‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪Peaking‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﺿﻭﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻭﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪) [Peaking Settings] v‬ﺹ‪(103.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [Peaking‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺳﻧﺎﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪) [Button Function‬ﺹ‪.(66 .‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪.Peaking‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ‪ Peaking‬ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻣﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺳﻥ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﺍ ﻟﻳﺱ ﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪t Lever Function‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫]‪[t Lever Function‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪Magnify‬‬‫ﺗﻛﺑﺭ ﺟﺯءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪) [AF Area] v .‬ﺹ‪(48.‬‬‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪1‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪2‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫]‪.[Dial Function‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ISO :‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫‪mode2‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫]‪.[Dial Function‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ :‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪ISO :‬‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫]‪ [RFunction‬ﻭ ]‪.[VFunction‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪ISO :R‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪ :Fn2‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫‪mode4‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ R‬ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫]‪ [RFunction‬ﻭ ]‪.[VFunction‬‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪ :R‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪ISO :Fn2‬‬‫‪mode5‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻧﺩﺓ ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،2‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻭ ]‪.[MF‬‬‫‪mode6‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫]‪.[Dial Function‬‬‫ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )‪.(n‬‬‫‪111 AR‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫]‪[Video Out] ،[HDMI‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻊ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺻّﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ )‪ (HD‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ ،AV‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪ [Video Out‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺹ‪.(102 .‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬‫)ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪(.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪A‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬‫)ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪(D‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪) AV‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ‪(CB-AVC3 :‬‬‫)ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫)ﺃﺻﻔﺭ( ﻭﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )ﺃﺑﻳﺽ(‪(.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺣﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪.AV‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ q‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ(‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻘﺻﻭﺻﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ AV‬ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳ ًﻘﺎ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ‬‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪1080p‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺝ ‪.1080p HDMI‬‬‫‪720p‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺭﺝ ‪.720p HDMI‬‬‫‪480p/576p‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺝ ‪ .480p/576p HDMI‬ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ 576p‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [PAL‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ‬‫]‪) [Video Out‬ﺹ‪.(102 .‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺧﺭﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺝ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪.USB‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ n‬ﻣﺧﻔﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 112‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫‪) [HDMI] v‬ﺹ‪(102 .‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ )‪(KControl Settings‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫]‪[KControl Settings‬‬‫ﻳﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪Change Color Saturation‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﺹ‪(45 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪M-IS 1‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪M/S/A/P‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﺹ‪(45 .‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪Pop Art‬‬‫‪Portrait‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪SCN/ART‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FHD F‬‬‫‪60p‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﺹ‪(45 .‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪113 AR‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫]‪[G/Info Settings‬‬‫‪) LV-Info‬ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ]‪ [LV-Info‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪INFO‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ‬‫ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪) [Histogram Settings] v .‬ﺹ‪(102 .‬‬‫‪) q Info‬ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ]‪ [q Info‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬‫‪ INFO‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ‬‫‪Shadow Highlight‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻠﺔ‬‫‪15‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‬‫ﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺟﻧﺑًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻧﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Fn1‬ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﻼﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Fn1‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪AR 114‬‬‫‪Fn1‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪Fn1‬‬‫‪54‬‬‫‪53‬‬‫‪2x‬‬

‫‪) G Settings‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ(‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺫﻱ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ .[G Settings‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪p‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫‪p‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪ 100–9‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬‫‪Wed‬‬‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪17‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪Sat‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫‪23‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪19‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪10‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪Fri‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Thu‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬

‫*‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪30p‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪p‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪2015.1‬‬‫‪Tue‬‬‫‪Mon‬‬‫‪Sun‬‬‫‪q‬‬‫‪30p‬‬‫‪FHD‬‬‫‪c 11:23 MOV‬‬‫‪c 11:24 MOV‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪c 12:12 MOV‬‬‫‪2015.01.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪*My Clips‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪p‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ‪ My Clips‬ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻫﻧﺎ )ﺹ‪.(42 .‬‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻳﺎ‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪W‬‬

‫]‪[# Slow Limit] [# X-Sync.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫‪M‬‬

‫ﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﻣﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ(‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺑﻁﺄ ﻣﻥ ‪)/1‬ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ×‪(2‬‬‫ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪[# X-Sync.‬‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬‫]‪*[# X-Sync.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬‫]‪[# Slow Limit‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺣﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ‬‫* ‪ 1/250‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪115 AR‬‬‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪X‬‬‫]‪[K Set‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‬‫‪*3456×4608‬‬‫‪) Y‬ﻛﺑﻳﺭ(‬‫‪SF‬‬‫)ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ(‬‫‪F‬‬‫)ﺩﻗﻳﻕ(‬‫‪N‬‬‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬‫‪B‬‬‫)ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ(‬‫‪YSF‬‬‫‪*YF‬‬‫‪*YN‬‬‫‪YB‬‬‫‪*2400×3200‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪1920×2560‬‬‫‪) X‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ(‬‫‪1440×1920‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪*XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ‬‫‪1200×1600‬‬‫‪*960×1280‬‬‫‪768×1024‬‬‫‪) W‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭ(‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪*WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪480×640‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺏ‬‫* ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪selfie assist‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫]‪[Selfie Assist‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﺭﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ]‪ [Selfie Assist‬ﻓﻲ ‪ c Custom Menu‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪.k‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﺣﻭﻙ‪.‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪45:67:89‬‬‫‪2341‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪One Touch‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫‪e-Portrait‬‬‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺻﺎﻟﺢ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(A) iAUTO‬‬‫‪Shutter Touch C‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﺣﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‬‫‪One Touch‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪ Custom Self Timer‬ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻲ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ )ﺹ‪.(58.‬‬‫‪AR 116‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ‪ C‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪b‬‬

‫]‪[Built-in EVF Style‬‬‫‪ :Style 1/2‬ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪ :Style 3‬ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪S-IS AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪FullHD‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪e ISO-A‬‬‫‪200 1023‬‬‫‪Hi +7‬‬‫‪-3‬‬‫‪Sh‬‬‫‪Sh-3‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪MY1‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪Style 2/Style 1‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪PBH‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪Style 3‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ(‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺣﺫﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪117 AR‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪،‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪(OI.Share) OLYMPUS Image Share ،‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪AR 118‬‬‫• ﻧﻘﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻠﺔ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﻓﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﻭﺍﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺳﺟﻝ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬‫‪http://oishare.olympus-imaging.com/‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺭﺃ "ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(163 .‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻥ‬‫ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﺑﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫• ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻣﺎ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺭﺍﺽ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺛﺎﻟﺙ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﻳﺩًﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺃﻣﻛﻥ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺷﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﻔﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺻﻌﺑًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﻳ ًﺋﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﻟﺩ ﻣﺟﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺳﺎﻛﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OI.Share App‬ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ‪ w‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺈﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ )‪ ،(SSID‬ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ‪ QR‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3/3‬‬‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ‪QR‬‬‫‪Preparing Wi-Fi Connection‬‬‫‪Connecting to your‬‬‫‪smartphone.‬‬‫‪Read QR code by‬‬‫‪'OLYMPUS Image Share'.‬‬‫‪SSID‬‬‫‪: E-M5II-P-00000001‬‬‫‪Password : 11223344‬‬‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ )‪(SSID‬‬‫ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ‬‫‪End Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ‪ QR‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ‪ ،QR‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ )‪ (SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ‬‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ MENU‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‪ [End Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Connection to Smartphone‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ q Playback Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ‪ OI.Share‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪119 AR‬‬‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺗﻬﺎ‬‫ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ‪" v .‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻣﺭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )]‪) "([Share Order‬ﺹ‪(82 .‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﺹ‪.(118 .‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ‪ w‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪30‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Image Transfer‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Save‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ُﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ]‪.[Private‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ]‪ [Connection to Smartphone‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ‪ w‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.Remote‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩﺓ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 120‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﺟﻝ ‪ GPS‬ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺳﺟﻝ‬‫‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ]‪.[Private‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺯﺭ ‪ Add Location‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺣﻔﻅ ﺳﺟﻝ ‪.GPS‬‬‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺳﺟﻝ ‪ ،GPS‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺳﺟﻝ ‪ .GPS‬ﻻ ﺗﻧ ِﻪ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.OI.Share‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ]‪ [Connection to Smartphone‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻟﻣﺱ ‪ w‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﻘﻝ ﺳﺟﻝ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.OI.Share‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺟﻝ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﻭﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪ g‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺃﺿﻳﻑ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪.GPS‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ .Add Location‬ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺳﺟﻝ‬‫‪.GPS‬‬‫‪121 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬‫ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ]‪ [Private‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ]‪[One-Time‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺟﺩ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻳﺢ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪ [Private‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫]‪ [One-Time‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺻﺩﻳﻕ ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻭ ]‪.[Private‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Connect Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫‪5‬‬‫• ]‪ :[Private‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ )ﻳﺗﺻﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ(‪ .‬ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫‪ OI.Share‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ]‪ :[One-Time‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ )ﻳﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ(‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ .OI.Share‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺃﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ]‪ :[Select‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ]‪ :[Off‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ]‪.[Private‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.R‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Private Password‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 122‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻣﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺩّﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Reset share Order‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Reset Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.I‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺩّﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﻳﻬﻳﺊ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ]‪.[Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Wi-Fi Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ d Setup Menu‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪123 AR‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺭ‬‫ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪USB‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪USB‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺭﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺷﺣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻁﺎﻟﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺿﻳﻑ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ]‪[Auto‬‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ]‪) [USB Mode‬ﺹ‪ (103 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬‫ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ‪:USB‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪:Windows‬‬‫‪/Windows 7 SP1/Windows Vista SP2/Windows XP SP3‬‬‫‪Windows 8.1/Windows 8‬‬‫‪:Macintosh‬‬‫‪ Mac OS X‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ – 10.5‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪10.9‬‬‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪USB‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ .[Storage‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪Storage‬‬‫‪MTP‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AR 124‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ Windows Photo Gallery‬ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows 8 ،Windows 7 ،Windows Vista‬ﺃﻭ‬‫‪ ،Windows 8.1‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [MTP‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.3‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺟﻬﺯﺍ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪.USB‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻪ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﻊ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Auto‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ]‪[USB Mode‬‬‫)ﺹ‪ (103 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬‫‪ OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﻫﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬‫ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Windows ‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ‪.‬‬‫‪Windows XP‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ "‪) "Setup‬ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ(‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﻧﻬﺕ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft‬ﺍﻟﺩﻋﻡ ﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ .Windows XP‬ﻭﺳﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ‬‫ﺃﻧﺕ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺃﻣﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7/Windows Vista‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ‬‫"‪ "OLYMPUS Setup‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ"‪) "Setup‬ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ(‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ‪ OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﻣﻥ "‪."http://support.olympus-imaging.com/ov3download/‬‬‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻟﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ‪.OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ "‪ ،"Setup‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ )‪ (OLYMPUS Setup‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫‪ Windows Explorer‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻧﻘﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟً ﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ "‪."LAUNCHER.EXE‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ "ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ "ﻧﻌﻡ" ﺃﻭ "ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ"‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ ،USB‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻁﺎﻟﺑﻙ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.[Storage‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺳﺟﱢ ﻝ ﻣﻧﺗﺞ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ "‪) "Registration‬ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ( ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪125 AR‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫• ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫‪/Windows Vista SP2/Windows XP SP3‬‬‫‪Windows 8.1/Windows 8/Windows 7 SP1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬‫‪ Pentium 4‬ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ 1.3‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‬‫)ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ Core2Duo‬ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ 2.13‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬‫ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ )ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪ 768 × 1024‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬‫‪ 65,536‬ﻟﻭﻥ ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ )ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑـ ‪ 16,770,000‬ﻟﻭﻥ(‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ "‪ "OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫‪Macintosh ‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪،‬‬‫ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺭ ﻧﻘﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟً ﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻧﻘﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟً ﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ "ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ" ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺭ "ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ"‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫• ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ "‪ "OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫‪ Mac OS X‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪–10.5‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪10.9‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬‫‪ Intel Core Solo/Duo‬ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ 1.5‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‬‫)ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ Core2Duo‬ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬‫ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ )ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻣﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪ 768 × 1024‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬‫‪ 32,000‬ﻟﻭﻥ ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ )ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑـ ‪ 16,770,000‬ﻟﻭﻥ(‬‫• ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ‬‫ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 126‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ )‪(PictBridge‬‬‫ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺭ‬‫ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪USB‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻁﺎﻟﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺿﻳﻑ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ]‪[Auto‬‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ]‪) [USB Mode‬ﺹ‪ (103 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪.[Print‬‬‫‪USB‬‬‫• ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ ،[One Moment‬ﻣﺗﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺻﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫‪Storage‬‬‫‪MTP‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(128 .‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪USB‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪.USB‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬‫‪ HI‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Easy Print Start‬‬‫‪PC/Custom Print‬‬‫‪127 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻁﺎﻟﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺿﻳﻑ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Auto‬ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺃﺟﻝ ]‪) [USB Mode‬ﺹ‪ (103 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪All Print‬‬‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ُﻧﺳﺦ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Multi Print‬‬‫‪All Index‬‬‫‪Print Order‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺟﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺃﺟﺭﻳﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺟﺯ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻼ‬‫ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪Size‬‬‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺩﻋﻣﻪ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Borderless‬‬‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‪.‬‬‫‪Pics/Sheet‬‬‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬‫]‪.[Multi Print‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ )ﺣﺟﺯ‬‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪123-3456‬‬‫‪12:30‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫‪More‬‬‫‪AR 128‬‬‫‪Select‬‬‫‪Single Print‬‬‫‪(f) Print‬‬‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﺯ‬‫]‪ [Single Print‬ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺟﻭﺯﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬‫‪Single Print‬‬‫)‪(t‬‬‫ﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺣﺟﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺣﺟﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ]‪ ،[Single Print‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪(u) More‬‬‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [All Print‬ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ ،[Option Set‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫×<‬

‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪Date‬‬‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪File Name‬‬‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻟﺗﺷﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪ (r‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺫﻳﺏ ﻭ‬‫‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﺫﻳﺏ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ ،[Print‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .Q‬ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪.[Continue‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ]‪ [Cancel‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .Q‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ؛ ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.MENU‬‬‫ﺣﺟﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ "ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ" ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﺿﺣً ﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻧﻔﺳﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ .DPOF‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ]<[‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]<[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ [U‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻛﺣﺟﺯ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺟﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻌﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Print Order‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫<‬
‫‪ALL‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [U‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪129 AR‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺻﻳﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪Date‬‬‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Time‬‬‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪X‬‬

‫‪No‬‬‫‪Date‬‬‫‪Time‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺫﻑ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﺛﻼﺛﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪AR 130‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺟﻭﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ]<[‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]<[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ [Reset‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .Q‬ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ‬‫]‪ [Keep‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ G‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺻﻳﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺟﻭﺯﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺩّﺩ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‬‫• ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺑﺩﺍ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺳﺗﻬﻠﻙ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﺯﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪) [Release Lag-Time‬ﺹ‪ (101 .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Short‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺑﻠﻎ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ )ﻭﻗﺕ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ(‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﻭﺍﺣﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﺧﺻﻳﺻًﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ‬‫ﺧﺻﻳﺻًﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻥ ‪ 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 240‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬‫)‪ 60/50‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ( ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻧﺣﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﺧﺗﻠ ًﻔﺎ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﻟﻳﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﻔﺳﺭ ﻋﻥ‬‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺗﺟﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻲ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺧﻠﻼً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﻭﻉ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ "ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(164 .‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪131 AR‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺑﻛﻠﻣﺔ "ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ"‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪) SD‬ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳًﺎ( ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪،SDXC ،SDHC ،SD :‬‬‫ﻭ ‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺏ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ "‪ ،"LOCK‬ﻟﻥ‬‫ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‬‫ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪LOCK‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪AR 132‬‬‫• ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺭﻫﺎ‬‫ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﻭﻟﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ‬‫ﺑﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪) [Eye-Fi] v .‬ﺹ‪(109 .‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﺗﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻁء ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪ .My Clips‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ "‪ "LOCK‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻘﻳﺩ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬‫ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺣﺟﻣًﺎ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ‪.4:3‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪YSF‬‬‫‪YF‬‬‫‪YN‬‬‫‪YB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪5472×7296‬‬‫‪3456×4608‬‬‫‪2400×3200‬‬‫‪1920×2560‬‬‫‪1440×1920‬‬‫‪1200×1600‬‬‫‪960×1280‬‬‫‪768×1024‬‬‫‪480×640‬‬‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ‪1/4 ،‬‬‫‪JPEG ،ORF‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫ﺿﻐﻁ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪ORF‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪ 17.8‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 17.3‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 10.8‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 7.5‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 3.5‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 2.4‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 5.6‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 3.4‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.7‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.2‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 3.2‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 2.2‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.1‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.8‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.8‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.3‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.7‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.3‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.9‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.4‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.9‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.6‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.4‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.3‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.6‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.4‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.3‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.3‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.1‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪48‬‬‫‪41‬‬‫‪79‬‬‫‪114‬‬‫‪248‬‬‫‪369‬‬‫‪155‬‬‫‪257‬‬‫‪508‬‬‫‪753‬‬‫‪271‬‬‫‪398‬‬‫‪782‬‬‫‪1151‬‬‫‪476‬‬‫‪701‬‬‫‪1356‬‬‫‪1968‬‬‫‪678‬‬‫‪984‬‬‫‪1907‬‬‫‪2653‬‬‫‪1034‬‬‫‪1488‬‬‫‪2774‬‬‫‪3814‬‬‫‪1564‬‬‫‪2260‬‬‫‪4068‬‬‫‪5548‬‬‫‪3589‬‬‫‪5085‬‬‫‪7628‬‬‫‪10171‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫‪RAW+LF‬‬‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬‫)‪(Pixel Count‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬‫)ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ(‬‫‪ 117.3‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ*‬‫‪7‬‬‫*ﺑﺎﻓﺗﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ‪ -‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺣﺟﻭﺯﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ ‪ -‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﻋﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺫﻑ‬‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻭﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻠﻑ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻭﻳﺑﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 9999‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑـ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫‪133 AR‬‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬‫‪ Micro Four Thirds‬ﻭﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ M.ZUIKO DIGITAL‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Four Thirds‬ﻭﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪.OM‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺟﻬًﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩ‬‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻣﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﺷﺗﻌﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ‬‫ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﺗﺑﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻔﻘﺩ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺛﺑّﺕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺛﺑّﺗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬‫‪8‬‬‫‪AR 134‬‬‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬‫‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬‫‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪OM‬‬‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬‫‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪Four Thirds‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻡ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻡ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻡ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻡ*‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻧﻌﻡ‬

‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬‫ﻻ‬‫ﻧﻌﻡ*‬

‫ﻻ‬

‫ﻻ‬

‫ﻻ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬‫‪ 1‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ‬‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺟﺭﻯ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫‪ 4‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ )ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬‫‪ 5‬ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬‫‪ 7‬ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬‫‪ 8‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪) UNLOCK‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺳﺣﺏ(‬‫‪ 9‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺯﺧﺭﻓﻳﻪ )ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻗﻠﻧﺳﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ(‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ‪.(8) UNLOCK‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‬‫)‪(ED14-42mm f3.5-5.6EZ‬‬‫• ﺗﺗﻣﺩﺩ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬‫ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻌﻳﺩ‬‫ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ‬‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺑﻌﻳﺩ‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪) [Electronic Zoom Speed] v‬ﺹ‪(110 .‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ‪ (LC-37C :‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻔﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻭﻳﻐﻠﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻟﻧﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁﺕ‬‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪135 AR‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺁﻟﻲ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﺎﻛﺭﻭ‬‫)‪(ED12-50mm f3.5-6.3EZ‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪MACRO‬‬‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬‫‪+‬‬‫‪MACRO‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬‫‪) E-ZOOM‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺁﻟﻲ(‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺯﻭﻡ ﺍﻵﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪) M-ZOOM‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ(‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪) MACRO‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺎﻛﺭﻭ(‬‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ 0.2‬ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ 0.5‬ﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ MACRO‬ﻭﺍﺳﺣﺏ‬‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ l‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬‫‪8‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ‪) MF‬ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ(‬‫)‪) ED12mm f2.0 ،17mm f1.8‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ(‪) ED12-40mm f2.8PRO ،‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻗﺑﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ((‬‫ﺣﺭﻙ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪ ،MF‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‬‫‪AF/MF‬‬‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻋﺗﻣﺎﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻧﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ F5.6‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪ 17mm f1.8‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ED12mm f2.0‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،MF‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻛﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 136‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﻠﻧﺳﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )‪(BCL-1580 ،BCL-0980 Fisheye‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ‪ MF‬ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﻭﻏﻠﻕ ﺣﺎﺟﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻻﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪ (57 .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 9‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ‪ BCL-0980 Fisheye‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 15‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ‬‫‪.BCL-1580‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩ‬‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺣﺎﺟﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪MF‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬‫ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬‫ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬‫‪ 42 – 14‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 40 – 12‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪f/3.5 – 5.6‬‬‫‪f/2.8‬‬‫‪f/4.0 – 5.6‬‬‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫‪29° – 75°‬‬‫‪30.3° – 84.1°‬‬‫‪8.2° – 75°‬‬‫ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‬‫‪ 7‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ‬‫‪ 9‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬‫‪ 14‬ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ‬‫‪ 11‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬‫‪ 15‬ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺯﺣﻳﺔ‬‫‪f/3.5 – 22‬‬‫‪f/2.8 – 22‬‬‫‪f/4.0 – 22‬‬‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫)ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ(‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﻡ –‬‫)‪ 14‬ﻣﻠﻡ(‬‫‪ 0.25‬ﻡ –‬‫)‪ 42‬ﻣﻠﻡ(‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﻡ –‬‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ‪AF/MF‬‬‫‪ ،AF/MF‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‬‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ‪AF/MF‬‬‫‪ 93‬ﺟﻡ‬‫‪ 382‬ﺟﻡ‬‫‪ 260‬ﺟﻡ‬‫‪ l60.8×22.5‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ l69.9×84‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ l63.5×83‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 37‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 62‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 58‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ*‬‫‪LH-61C‬‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ )ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻧﺳﻭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء(‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫)ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻗﻁﺭ × ﻁﻭﻝ(‬‫ﻗﻁﺭ ﻣﺟﺭﻯ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬‫ﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪ 150 – 14‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﻡ –‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬‫‪ED14-42mm‬‬‫‪f3.5-5.6 EZ‬‬‫‪ED12-40mm‬‬‫‪f2.8PRO‬‬‫‪ED14-150mm‬‬‫‪f4.0-5.6 II‬‬‫* ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪ ،ED12-40mm‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪137 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬‫‪25mm f1.8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬‫ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬‫‪ 25‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪f/1.8‬‬‫‪f/3.5 – 6.3‬‬‫‪f/8‬‬‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫‪49.5°‬‬‫‪24° – 84°‬‬‫ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‬‫‪ 7‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ‬‫‪ 9‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬‫‪ 10‬ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ‬‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ‪،‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺯﺣﻳﺔ‬‫‪f/1.8 – 22‬‬‫‪f/3.5 – 22‬‬‫ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪f/8‬‬‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫)ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ(‬‫‪ 0.25‬ﻡ –‬‫‪ 0.35‬ﻡ –‬‫‪ 0.5 – 0.2‬ﻡ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻛﺭﻭ(‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﻡ –‬‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫)ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻗﻁﺭ × ﻁﻭﻝ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬‫‪AR 138‬‬‫‪ 50 – 12‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 9‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪140°‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ )ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻧﺳﻭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء(‬‫‪8‬‬‫‪ED12-50mm‬‬‫‪f3.5-6.3EZ‬‬‫‪BCL-0980‬‬‫‪Fisheye‬‬‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ‪AF/MF‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫‪ 137‬ﺟﻡ‬‫‪ 212‬ﺟﻡ‬‫‪ 28‬ﺟﻡ‬‫‪ l57.8×42‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ l57×83‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ l56×12.8‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫ﻗﻁﺭ ﻣﺟﺭﻯ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬‫‪ 46‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ 52‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫–‬‫ﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫‪LH-49B‬‬‫‪LH-55B‬‬‫–‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺳﻣﻳﻙ‪.‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪(HLD-8‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ .Fn‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ )ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‬‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.HLD-8‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻧﺯﻉ ﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ HLD-8‬ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻘﺑﺿﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ‬‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪B-Fn2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺯﺭ ‪B-Fn1‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪HLD-8‬‬‫ﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻘﺑﺿﺔ )‪(HLD-8G‬‬

‫‪b‬‬

‫‪a‬‬

‫‪a‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫ﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪(HLD-6P‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‬‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬‫‪9‬‬‫ﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻘﺑﺿﺔ )‪(HLD-8G‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺯﻉ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (a‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ .HLD-8G‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،HLD-8G‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.HLD-8G‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺯﻉ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )‪ (b‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺑﺿﺔ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ‬‫ﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺑﺿﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪139 AR‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ .BLN-1‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﺯﺭ ‪ B-Fn‬ﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ HLD-8‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‪[Button Function‬‬‫)ﺹ‪) [Opt. Grip Dial Func.] ،[Dial Function] ،(66 .‬ﺹ‪ (101 .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪ c‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ‬‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺱ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪AR 140‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ )‪(HLD-8‬‬‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺭﺽ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﻣﻕ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ )ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻏﻁﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ(‬‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺵ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺁﻳﻭﻥ ‪1 × BLN-1‬‬‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‪ :‬ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ‪AC-3‬‬‫‪ :HLD-8G‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 59.5 × 73.6 × 126.3‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ :HLD-6P‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 56.4 × 31.3 × 117.8‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫‪ :HLD-8G‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 108‬ﺟﻡ‬‫‪ :HLD-6P‬ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 126.2‬ﺟﻡ‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ‪) IEC 529 IPX1‬ﺗﺣﺕ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ‬‫‪(OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻣﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺿﺭﺭً ﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻅﺎﻓﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻣﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﺯﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻣﺑﺗﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺿﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺭﻗﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺗﻼءﻡ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﺟﺎﺗﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ TTL-AUTO‬ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ‪ .Super FP‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‬‫ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ )ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ(‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺛﺎﺋﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪) GN‬ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ( )‪(ISO100‬‬‫‪FL-600R‬‬‫‪،MANUAL ،AUTO ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪ 85) GN36‬ﻣﻠﻡ*‪ 24) GN20 (1‬ﻣﻠﻡ*‪(1‬‬‫‪FP MANUAL ،FP TTL AUTO‬‬‫‪FL-300R‬‬‫‪FL-14‬‬‫‪RF-11‬‬‫‪TF-22‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪RC‬‬‫‪‬‬‫‪MANUAL ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪ 28) GN20‬ﻣﻠﻡ*‪(1‬‬‫‪‬‬‫‪MANUAL ،AUTO ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪ 28) GN14‬ﻣﻠﻡ*‪(1‬‬‫–‬‫‪GN11‬‬‫–‬‫‪GN22‬‬‫–‬‫‪MANUAL ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ )ﻳﺣﺳﺏ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻠﻡ(‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ RC‬ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﺷﻐﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ MODE‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪.RC‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﻭﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [On‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ]‪ [# RC Mode‬ﻓﻲ ‪) X Shooting Menu 2‬ﺹ‪.(85 .‬‬‫• ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪.RC‬‬‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫• ﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ )ﻻﺣﻅ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(RC‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪141 AR‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪/‬ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Super FP‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ‬‫‪.Super FP‬‬‫‪A Mode‬‬‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬‫• ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [HI‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [MID‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[LO‬‬‫‪LO‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Ch‬‬‫‪+5.0‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫–‬‫‪+3.0‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪TTL‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪TTL‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ‬‫• ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬‫• ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻋﺩﻝ‬‫ﻗﻭﺓ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟـ‬‫‪ ،MANUAL‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺩﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‬‫ﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺩﻯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪30°‬‬‫‪30°‬‬‫‪60°‬‬‫‪7m‬‬‫‪50°‬‬‫‪50°‬‬‫‪5m‬‬‫‪100°‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪AR 142‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻧﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﺗﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ‬‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ٍ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻭﻣﺿﺎﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ‬‫)ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺧﺭﺝ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺷﺗﺕ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺑﺿﺔ‬‫• ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﻥ ‪ 250‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﺎ ﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ X‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ Olympus‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،M‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ]‪.[AUTO‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻼ ًﺷﺎ ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻁﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻓﺋﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻠﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪(MMF-3/MMF-2) Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ُﺑﻌﺩ )‪(RM-UC1‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺃﺑﺳﻁ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻬﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﻟﻸﺿﻭﺍء‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻛﺭﻭ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌُﺩ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(10 .‬‬‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﻛﺭﻭ ﺳﻬﻼً ﻭﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺏ‬‫‪ OLYMPUS‬ﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ‪ f) SCN‬ﺃﻭ ‪ w‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(m‬‬‫ﻓﻧﺟﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ )‪(EP-16‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺑﻔﻧﺟﺎﻥ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬‫‪9‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫ﺗﺣﺗﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪ Four Thirds‬ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ .Four Thirds‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪143 AR‬‬‫ﺧﺭﻳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺽ‬‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪BLN-1‬‬‫‪BCN-1‬‬‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ‬‫‪HLD-8‬‬‫‪AC-3‬‬‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺣﻥ‬‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬‫ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫‪EP-16‬‬‫‪ECG-2‬‬‫ﻓﻧﺟﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪RM-UC1‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪/USB‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪/AV‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬‫ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ‪ /‬ﺣﺯﺍﻡ‬‫ﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﻛﺗﻑ‬‫ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬‫ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ*‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬‫ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪FL-14‬‬‫‪FL-600R‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬‫‪/SDHC/SD‬‬‫‪Eye-Fi/SDXC‬‬‫‪FL-300R‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬‫‪OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺏ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻣﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ‬‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪.OM‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺏ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻣﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 144‬‬

E-M5II ‫ ﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬:‫ ﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻱ‬:.Olympus ‫ ﺑﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺏ‬،‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬2‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬*‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12mm f2.0
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f2.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 25mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 45mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 60mm f2.8 Macro
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 75mm f1.8
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 9-18mm f4.0-5.6
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12-40mm f2.8 PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 12-50mm f3.5-6.3 EZ
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 14-42mm f3.5-6.3 EZ
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 14-42mm f3.5-5.6 II R
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED14-150mmf4.0-5.6 II
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 40-150mm f4.0-5.6 R
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED40-150mmf2.8 PRO
M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 75-300mm f4.8-6.7 II

FCON-P01‫ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ‬WCON-P01‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺭﻳﺿﺔ‬MCON-P01‫ﻣﺎﻛﺭﻭ‬MCON-P02‫ﻣﺎﻛﺭﻭ‬4

9*Teleconverter MC-14

Four Thirds ‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬1*MMF-3/MMF-2‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬Four Thirds ‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬OM ‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬

1

*MF-2

2 OM ‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ‬2

STF-22‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬*TF-222‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ‬SRF-11*RF-11‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺎﻛﺭﻭ‬FC-1.‫ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﻭﻟﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬Eye-Fi ‫ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬3*
ED40-150mmf2.8 PRO ‫ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬4*

145 AR‫‪10‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻛﺗﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺩ‬‫• ﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻓﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻳﺑﻙ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬‫• ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﺯﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪) [Sleep] v‬ﺹ‪(103 .‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ )‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ( ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ #‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪10‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺳﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺋﻥ ﺫﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺻﻌﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻌﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺛﺑﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﺩﻑ ﺫﻭ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬‫ﺿﻭء ﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻻ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺗﺿﺎء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺛﺑﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻻ‬‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﻳﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺑﺎﻳﻧﺔ‬‫‪AR 146‬‬‫ﻫﺩﻑ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬‫ﻫﺩﻑ ﻟﻳﺱ ﺑﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ ﻭﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺑﻌﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺳﻣﺢ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ [Noise Reduct.‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫‪) [Noise Reduct.] v‬ﺹ‪(104 .‬‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ‬‫]‪ [Digital Tele-converter‬ﻭ ]‪.[Image Aspect‬‬‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻭﻗﺕ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﻬﺎ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪" v .‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ"‬‫)ﺹ‪(18 .‬‬‫ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫• ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻳﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﻣﻬﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،M‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻁﺭﺃﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء‬‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ( ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺑﻪ ﺿﻭء ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺭﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻁﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺧﺫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺿﻭء ﻗﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ‬‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻳﺩﻙ ﻟﺣﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ" )ﺹ‪(134 .‬‬‫ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺭﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ )ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ( ﻣﻠﺗﺻﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ]‪.[Pixel Mapping‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻟﻌﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪ - Pixel Mapping" v .‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ" )ﺹ‪(151 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬‫ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﺑﻕ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪:‬‬‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ]‪ [T‬ﻭ ]‪ ،[Noise Reduct.‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫‪147 AR‬‬‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻝ‬‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻲ‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Card‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﺣﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ "‪ ."LOCK‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬‫)ﺹ‪(132 .‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺣﺟﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫ﺣﺟﺯ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺏ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Card Error‬‬‫‪Write Protect‬‬‫‪Card Full‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Clean the contact area of‬‬‫‪the card with a dry cloth.‬‬‫‪Clean Card‬‬‫‪Format‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪10‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ ،[Clean Card‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺍﻏﻠﻕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ‬‫ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺩﺩ ]‪ ،[Yes][Format‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪Q‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ‬‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Picture‬‬‫‪Picture Error‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻠﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺩ ﺃﺻﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻠﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫‪ The Image Cannot‬ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪Be Edited‬‬‫‪AR 148‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻝ‬‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Internal camera‬‬‫‪temperature is too‬‬‫‪high. Please wait‬‬‫‪for cooling before‬‬‫‪camera use.‬‬‫‪Battery Empty‬‬‫‪No Connection‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻲ‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﻟﺣﻳﻥ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﻟﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﺯﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Paper‬‬‫ﻧﻔﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Ink‬‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Jammed‬‬‫‪Settings Changed‬‬‫‪Print Error‬‬‫‪Cannot Print‬‬‫‪The lens is locked.‬‬‫‪Please extend the‬‬‫‪lens.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺳﺣﺏ ﺗﺑﻘﻰ‬‫ﻣﺿﻣﻭﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(15 .‬‬‫‪Please check the‬‬‫‪status of a lens.‬‬‫ﺣﺩﺙ ﺧﻠﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺷ ّﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻡ ﺣﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺷﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪149 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ‬‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺳﺎﺥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻏﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻘﻣﺎﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء ﺑﺻﺎﺑﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ ﻭﺍﻋﺻﺭﻫﺎ‬‫ﺟﻳﺩًﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺟﻔﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻗﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﻁﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻏﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء ﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺍﻋﺻﺭﻫﺎ ﺟﻳﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻔﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﺑﻌﻳﺩًﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻓﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺧﺗﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺑﺭ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﻣﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺛﺑّﺕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺛﺑّﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬‫ﻏﻁﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺷﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺗﺷﺗﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻹﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻁﺢ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻱ ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺯﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻣﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻛﻳﻣﻳﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﻣﺎﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺂﻛﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻔﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺭﻛﺕ ﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‬‫ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 150‬‬‫‪ - Pixel Mapping‬ﻓﺣﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﺣﺹ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [Pixel Mapping‬ﻓﻲ ‪) c Custom Menu‬ﺹ‪ (109 .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪.k‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ‪ I‬ﺛﻡ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ]‪ [Busy‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‪،‬‬‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺑﺩﺃ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪151 AR‬‬‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬.[Myset] ‫ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬:1*.[Reset] ‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬Full] ‫ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬:2*.[Reset] ‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬Basic] ‫ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬:3*‫ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬K
v
85
86
70
61
62
60
88
88

89

3* 2* 1*‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
















―
―
jNatural
YN
MOVnFHDF60p
4:3
Off
―

 










 

90
91


 



93

 

94

 



59





60





141

 



Card Setup
Reset/Myset
Picture Mode
Still Picture
Movie

o
j/Y
Off Time Lapse Settings
99
Frame
Start Waiting
00:00:01
Time
00:00:01
Interval TimeTime Lapse
Off
Movie
Off
1.0EV 3f
AE BKT
A–B
WB
―
BKT
G–M
―
FL BKT―
ISO BKT―
ART BKT
Off
Off
Frame
Off
Auto Gain
Off
OverlayOff(‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬0) On
Anti-Shockz(‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬0) On
Silent[♥]Off Noise Reduction[♥](‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬0) On
High Res Shot‫ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬0#Charge Time
Off‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬W

K
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
j/Y/iBracketing

X

10

HDR

‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬

91
92
92
53

 

‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬Multiple Exposure
Keystone Comp.
Anti-ShockD/Silent♥High Res Shot
# RC Mode

AR 152

q Playback Menu
v

3*

2*

80










1*

‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
―

96
96
97
98
98
129
98
119



‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬q‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
Start
BGM
Slide
Slide IntervalMovie Interval

Joy
All
3sec
Short
On

―
―
―
―
―
―
―

RAW Data Edit
JPEG Edit
R

m

R
Sel. Image

Edit

Image Overlay
Print Order
Reset Protect
Connection to Smartphoned Setup Menu
v

3*

2*

1*

18
99

10

99



99






122

‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬

99
99



‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬――،k ±0 ،j ±0
Natural0.5secPrivate
―
―
―
Off
―

‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬X*W‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬di
Rec View
Wi-Fi Connect Settings
Private Password
Reset share Order
Reset Wi-Fi Settings

Wi-Fi
Settings

c Menu Display
Firmware.‫* ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‬c Custom Menuv

100

153 AR

3*

2*

1*

































‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬

mode1
mode2
mode1

‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
S-AF
C-AF
Off
S-AF
C-AF
MF
On
On
b

Still Picture
Movie‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬AF/MF R c
AF ModeFull-time AF
AEL/AFL
Reset Lens
Bulb/Time Focusing
Focus Ring

v

100

3*





2*

1*

















‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
Off
Off
o
On
K
On

AEL/AFL
Multi Function
u

HDR
RREC

66





z
*#
*j/Y
P
AEL/AFLP
AF Stop



P VOL









101



101




















































Off
On
5 fps
10 fps
5 fps
11 fpsS-I.S. Auto
M-IS1
Off
On
Off
NormalMF Assist

P Set HomeAF Illuminat.
I Face Priority
AF Area PointerButton/Dial/Lever S
UFunction
VFunction
YFunction
ZFunction
RFunctionzFunction
ButtonFunction
IFunction
GFunctionnFunction
mFunctionnFunctionlFunction
P
A
S
M
Menu

Dial
Functionq
Dial Direction

10‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬

Ps/F
FNo./F
Shutter/F
Shutter/FNo.
FG/HI
Prev/Next/G/U
Dial1
Exposure
Dial1
Ps
Off
mode 1

MagnifyPeaking‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬AF/MF R c

Mode Dial Function
t Lever Function
Opt. Grip Dial Func.
Release/j T
Rls Priority S
Rls Priority C
j L fpsj H fps♥j L fps♥j H fps
Still Picture
Image
Movie Stabilizer
j Image Stabilization
Half Way Rls With IS
Lens I.S. Priority
Release Lag-Time.[Direct Function] ‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ‬nFunction] ‫* ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬AR 154

v

3*

2*

1*

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬Disp/8/PC U c‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
1080p
Off




―



102








































10













‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬













،(u) Custom1 ،Image Only
Level Gauge) Custom2(Display"My Clips" ،Calendar ،O
playbackOff‫ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ‬
255
0
On
On1
On2
Off
Off
Normal
mode1
On
Auto
mode2
Off
White
Normal
On

103


























155 AR

Live Guide
Live SCPArt Menu
Scene Menu
Overall ،Image Only





Hold
1min
4h
On
Auto
،Magnify ،Color Creator
Aspectmode1

HDMI OutHDMI Control

HDMI

Video Out
iAUTO
P/A/S/M KControl
Settings
ART
SCN
q Info
LV-Info

G/InfoSettings

G Settings
Displayed Grid
Picture Mode Settings
Highlight Histogram
Settings
Shadow
Mode Guide
M
BULB/TIME Live View
Boost
COMP
OthersFrame Rate
Art LV Mode
Expand LV Dyn. Range
Flicker reduction
LV Close Up ModezLock
Peaking Color
Highlight
Peaking
Intensity
Settings
Image
Brightness Adj.
Backlit LCD
Sleep
Auto Power Off
8
USB Mode
Multi Function Settings
Menu Recall

v

3*

2*

1*

‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬





































1/3EV
Auto
Standard
Auto
1/3EV
1600 :High Limit
200 :Default
P/A/S‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬Exp/p/ISO V c
EV Step
Noise Reduct.
Noise Filter
ISO
ISO Step‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬ISO-Auto Set



p
Auto
8min
-7
Off
0.5 sec
1 sec

ISO-Auto
Metering
AEL Metering
Bulb/Time Timer
Bulb/Time Monitor
Live Bulb
Live Time
Composite Settings





1/250

# X-Sync.







1/60

# Slow Limit







Off

w+F
K/Color/WB X







104






































# Custom W
105


























106


K4 WN

G : 0 ،A : 0
—
—

K Set

2400×3200
960×1280
OffAuto

Xiddle
Pixel
Count
Wmall
Shading Comp.
WB
All SetAll >All Reset





On

W Keep Warm ColorWB Auto





sRGB

WB+#
Color Space10‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬105

،K3 XN ،K2 YN ،K1 YF

AR 156

v

3*

2*

1*













‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬Off
RAW+JPEG
Reset
Off
No
350dpi
Off



106








107

—
—









107

10
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬157 AR±0

Built-In R Recording
VolumeMICR(Drop Frame) DF(Rec Run) RR—‫ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ‬

،n2 FHD K ،n1 FHD F
n4 FHD G ،n3 FHD F
On
mode1



mode1





Style 3Custom1 ،Basic Information
Level) Custom2 ،(u)(Gauge Display
Off
On



On



On





nMode
Movie R









109

P
On
±0
On
Off
On
Off
8



108









‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬Record/Erase Y c
Quick Erase
RAW+JPEG Erase
File Name
Edit Filename
Priority Set
dpi Settings
Copyright Info.
Copyright
Artist Name
Settings
Copyright Name
Movie Z‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬KVolume Limiter
Wind Noise Reduction
KPlug-in PowerPCM Recorder K Link
Headphone Volume
Time Code
Time
Mode
Code
Count Up
Settings
Starting Timen Info Settings
Movie Specification Settings
Movie EffectMovie+Photo ModenShutter Function
Built-In EVF b
Built-in EVF Style
V Info Settings
V Displayed Grid
EVF Auto Switch
EVF Auto
EVF
Luminance
AdjustV Half Way Level

v

3*

2*

1*

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬K Utility k c
Pixel Mapping‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬

—


109



±0



±0
PBH Battery




—



On
On
NormalNormal
On






110

p
ExposureJ
Shift
5: Warning Level: Battery Priority
Level Adjust
Touch Screen Settings
Eye-FiStill Picture
Electronic
Movie Zoom Speed
Selfie Assist

On




3 sec

Backlit LCD

3 sec

Sleep

Quick
Sleep
Mode

10
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬AR 158‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬‫ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻠﻡ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ‬‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‬‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬‫ﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ‪ LCD ،‬ﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ ‪ TFT‬ﻗﻳﺎﺱ "‪ 3.0‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 1,040,000‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ )ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪(3 : 2‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫ﻏﺎﻟﻕ ﻣﺑﺭﻣﺞ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬‫‪ 60 - 1/8000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺿﻭﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪ Micro Four Thirds Standard‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‬‫‪ ،M.Zuiko Digital‬ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺿﻌﻑ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ "‪Live MOS 4/3‬‬‫‪ 17,200,000‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 16,050,000‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫‪ 17.3‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ 13.0‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬‫‪(4:3) 1.33‬‬‫ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ‬‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 2,360,000‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬‫‪100%‬‬‫‪ 21‬ﻣﻠﻡ )‪ –1‬ﻡ‪ (-1‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ‪Live MOS‬‬‫‪100%‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪ 81‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ‬‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪) TTL‬ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‬‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪/‬ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻱ‪/‬ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬‫‪) 20 - –2 EV‬ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪(ISO100 ،M.ZUIKO DIGITAL 17mm f2.8‬‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫‪ :P/iAUTO :A‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ :A/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ :S/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺍﻉ‪ :M/‬ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪/‬‬‫‪ :ART/PHOTO STORY :J‬ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ‪ :SCN/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ :n/‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬‫ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫‪ 1 ،1/3) 25600 - 200 ،LOW‬ﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪(EV‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬‫‪ 1 ،1/2 ،1/3) ±5 EV‬ﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪(EV‬‬‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺑﻕ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )‪ 7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪/‬ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪/‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬‫ﺑﻠﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬‫‪159 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬‫‪ SDXC ،SDHC ،SD‬ﻭ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪UHS-II‬‬‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪) JPEG ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ )‪ ،((DCF‬ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪،RAW‬‬‫ﺻﻳﻐﺔ ‪MP‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻘﺔ‬‫‪ ،Exif 2.3‬ﻭﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ )‪ ،(DPOF‬ﻭ‪،PRINT Image Matching III‬‬‫ﻭ‪PictBridge‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪Wave‬‬‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬‫‪MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 / Motion JPEG‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬‫ﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‪ 48 PCM ،‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭﻫﺭﺗﺯ‬‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺭﺏ‪/‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻭﻳﻡ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‬‫ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ )‪(T‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ 12 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ 2/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻛﻭﻥ‪ 1 :‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ 4 :‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬‫)ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪(.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪) TTL-AUTO‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺑﻕ ‪MANUAL/(TTL‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪ 1/250‬ﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬‫‪IEEE 802.11b/g/n‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ )ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪ ،USB‬ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪/(AV‬ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭ )ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪(D‬‬‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ × ‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬‫‪ 123.7‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﻋﺭﺽ( × ‪ 85‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 44.5‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﻋﻣﻕ( )ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ(‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 469‬ﺟﻡ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬‫ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫‪ –10‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 40 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪ –20 /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 60 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ(‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬‫‪) 90% - 30%‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪) 90% - 10%/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‬‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺵ‬‫ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ‪) IEC 529 IPX1‬ﺗﺣﺕ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪(OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ‬‫ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻛ ٌﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪High-Definition‬‬‫‪ Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪.HDMI Licensing LLC.‬‬‫‪AR 160‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻓﻼﺵ ‪FL-LM3‬‬‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬‫‪•ISO100) 9.1‬ﻡ( ‪•ISO200) 12.9‬ﻡ(‬‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ‬‫ﺗﻐﻁﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪ 12‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 24‬ﻣﻠﻡ ﺑﺻﻳﻐﺔ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻠﻡ(‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 43.6‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﻋﺭﺽ( × ‪ 49.4‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 39‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﻋﻣﻕ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 51‬ﺟﻡ‬‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺵ‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺷﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ‪) IEC 529 IPX1‬ﺗﺣﺕ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ‪(OLYMPUS‬‬‫‪ ‬ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ‬‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ‬‫‪BLN-1‬‬‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻲ‬‫‪ 7.6‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻳﺔ‬‫‪ 1220‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ‬‫‪ 500‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ(‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ‬‫‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 40 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ(‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 36.0‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﻋﺭﺽ( × ‪ 15.4‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 50.2‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﻋﻣﻕ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ‬‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 52‬ﺟﻡ‬‫‪ ‬ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭ‬‫‪ 100‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ‪ 240 -‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )‪ 60/50‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭ‬‫‪ 8.7‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‪ 600 ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬‫‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ(‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ‬‫‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 40 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‪/‬‬‫‪ –20‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ ‪ 60 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ(‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 67‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﻋﺭﺽ( × ‪ 26‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 95.5‬ﻣﻠﻡ )ﻋﻣﻕ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ )ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ(‬‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 77‬ﺟﻡ‬‫• ﻛﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻻ‬‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ‬‫‪BCN-1‬‬‫ﺗﺧﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺯﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪161 AR‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬‫ﺧﻁﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺗﺢ‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻅﻬﺭ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬‫ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﻅﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻫﻠﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻬﻙ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﺛﻠﺙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺛﺎﺋﻕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻁﺭ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﻁﻔﻳﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺩﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ!‬‫ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﻓﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪AR 162‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ — ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻛﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ — ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﺋﻁ‬‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻣﺑﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﻅﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻳﺭﻭﺳﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺿﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ — ﻷﻣﺎﻧﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ — ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺍﻷﻗﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻕ — ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﻛﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ‬‫ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ — ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ — ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ‬‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﺳﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ — ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣَﻭﻗﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻧﺑﻌﺙ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪،‬‬‫ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﺿﺧﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻁﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻭﻕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ‬‫‪ .Olympus‬ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪ .‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺷﻭﺍﺣﻥ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺃﺑﺩًﺍ ﺑﺣﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣُﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭَ ﻁﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻁﻠﻕ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ‪) LED‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻳﻪ ﺍﻑ‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ )ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﻡ(‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ ﻣﻧﻬﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻳﻧﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻟﻠﺭﺅﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺿﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺑﻕ ﺃﻁﻔﺎﻟﻙ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺑﻌﻳﺩًﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺭُﺿﻊ ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻻﺷﺗﺑﺎﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻧﺎﻕ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺑﺗﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺻﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‬‫ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺩﻭﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻼﻑ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺧﺩﺵ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺭﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺭﺍﺋﺣﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺗﻐﻳﺭﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻭﻫﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺑﺣﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺑﺗﻌﺩ ﻋﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭ ﻓﻭﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﻭﺃﺻﺎﺏ ﻣﻼﺑﺳﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺷﺭﺗﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻳﻙ‬‫ﺧﻠﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺑﺱ ﻭﻏﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻣﺎء ﻧﻘﻲ ﻭﺟﺎﺭ ﻭﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﺣﺭﻭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬‫ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﺑﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺗﻥ ﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺗﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻌﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬‫ﺍﻵﻣﻥ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﺋﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻣﻧﻌﻬﺎ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺩﺑﺎﺑﻳﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻙ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻗﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﺣﻕ ﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ُﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ‬‫ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﻓﻙ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻭﺍﻝ ﻋﻥ‬‫ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻳﻧﻳﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﻏﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬‫ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺎء ﻧﻘﻲ ﻭﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺯﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻧﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ) ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻭﺵ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻰ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺑﻌﻳﺩًﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻷﻟﻳﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺑﻠﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺻﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻳﻧﻬﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻳﻥ‬‫ﻁﻔﻝ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺻﺩ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ SDXC/SDHC/SD‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬‫‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﺗﺻﻝ‬‫ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻧﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻧﺑﻌﺎﺙ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺟﻳﺞ ﻏﻳﺭ‬‫ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻓﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﻭﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ‬‫ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻳﺩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻁﻼﻗﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪163 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪AR 164‬‬‫•‬‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻅﺕ ﺍﻧﺑﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﺎﻥ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺣﻭﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻳ ٍﺩ ﻋﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ‬‫ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻳﺩﻳﻙ ﻟﻼﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﺩﻳﻥ ﻣﺑﻠﻠﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻁﻼ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺗﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺣﺯﺍﻡ ﺟﻳﺩًﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﺣﺯﺍﻡ‬‫ﺑﺄﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺿﺭﺭً ﺍ ﺑﺎﻟ ًﻐﺎ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ُﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻋ‬‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻳﺭﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ‬‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻐﻁﻰ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻲ ﺗﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺗﺑﻪ‬‫ﺟﻳﺩًﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ‬‫ﻟﻠﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ‬‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺭﺗﺩﺍء ﻗﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ‬‫ﺇﻥ ﺃﻣﻛﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺷﺗﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ‬‫ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺳﻭﺍء ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﻭﺍﻁﺊ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣَﺭﻛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻁﻳﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣُﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﻁﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻅﺭﻭﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻼﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺳﻘﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻼﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ‬‫ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻌﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺋﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﺿًﺎ ﻟﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺿﻭء ﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺣﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬‫ﻣﻭﻗﻌًﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﺩًﺍ ﻭﺟﺎ ًﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺎﺛﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬‫ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ‬‫ﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ‪/‬ﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻭﻟﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ‬‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺯﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺑﻘﻳﻭﺩ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ‬‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻭﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء‬‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺑﺈﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ‬‫ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻛﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﺩًﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ‬‫‪ .Olympus‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺧﻁﺭ‬‫ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﻭﻉ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬‫ﻭﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬‫ﻭﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﻳﻥ‬‫ﻧﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺷﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻣﻥ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺃﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻭ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺃﺻﻠﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺩﻻﻉ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬‫‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﺃﺻﺑﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﺎﻣﺿﺔ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ‬‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺷﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻁﻝ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻗﻁﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺗﻌﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻁﻝ؛ ﻭﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻗﻝ‬‫ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻗﺭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻣﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﺇﺯﺍء ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺯﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬‫ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺭﺗﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻗﺭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻣﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺎﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺭﺗﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻧﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺯﺍﻋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻣﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ‬‫ﺃﻡ ﺿﻣﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺷﺄﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻟﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻭﺍﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ‬‫ﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺿﻣﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺳﻭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ‬‫ﺃﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻭﻻ‬‫ﻳﻘﺗﺻﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ( ﺗﻧﺟﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ‬‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻭﺩ‬‫ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ‪ Olympus‬ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣُﺭﺧﺹ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎﻙ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻭﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺇﺯﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣُﺭﺧﺹ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻧﺗﻬﻙ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺃﺻﺣﺎﺏ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫•‬‫• ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻧﻔﺩ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﺻﻣﻣﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‬‫ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﺕ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻠﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻭﺛﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺣﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ‬‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﻳﺩًﺍ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬‫ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻑء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﺕ ﻟﻠﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻥ‬‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻓﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺳﻳﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺷﺭﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻌﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬‫ﻛﻭﻛﺑﻧﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﻠﻛﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ‬‫ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻻﻟﺗﺯﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻸﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )ﺍﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺭ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻎ(‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ‬‫ﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻧﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﺳﺗﺭﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺿﻌﻳﻑ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬‫ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻠﺗﺻﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻣﻳﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ‬‫ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺎﻡ ﻟﻸﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ‬‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻫﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻁﻝ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬‫‪165 AR‬‬‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‬‫ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺟﻭﺯ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﺍ ًء‬‫ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻳﻛﺎﻧﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪،‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺗﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﻭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪Olympus‬‬‫ﺑﺣﻕ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﻭﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﺯﺍﻡ‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺛﺑﺕ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻣﻌﻳﺏ‪،‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ )ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻌﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻁﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻭﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ‬‫ﺷﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ OLYMPUS EUROPA SE & Co. KG‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬‫ﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪:‬‬‫‪ ،http://www.olympus-europa.com‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪،‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻪ ﺑﻧﺎءًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ Olympus‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬‫‪ Olympus‬ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻛﻣﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺭﺿﻳﻙ ﻭﺑﺄﺳﺭﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻟﻠﻣﻁﺎﻟﺑﺔ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺇﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪http://consumer-service.olympus-europa.com‬‬‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ )ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ( ﺃﻭ ﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺳﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬‫ﻭﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍء ﻣﻧﻪ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪OLYMPUS EUROPA SE & Co. KG‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪:‬‬‫‪ ،http://www.olympus-europa.com‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻁﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻭﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬‫‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺳﻣﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻛﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻭﺳﻧﺔ ﺷﻬﺭ ﻭﻳﻭﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍء ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺳﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻌﺎﺕ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻛﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍء ﻭﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ( ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻟﻥ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ‪ Olympus‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺧﺎﻁﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻛﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﻻ ﻳﻐﻁﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻭﺳﻳﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻧﻙ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ‪،‬‬‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ‬‫ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬‫)ﺃ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺳﻭء ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ‬‫ﺫﻛﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‬‫)ﺏ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬‫ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻼء ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‬‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪AR 166‬‬‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "‪ "CE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ‬‫ﻭﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬‫"‪ "CE‬ﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺑﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺛﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺭ‬‫‪ Olympus Imaging Corp.‬ﻭ‬‫‪Olympus Europa SE & Co. KG‬‬
‫ﺑﺄﻥ ‪ E-M5II‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ‪.EC/1999/5‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ‪:‬‬‫‪http://www.olympus-europa.com/‬‬‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]ﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻬﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺟﻝ ﻣﺭﺳﻭﻡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺧﻁﺎﻥ ﻣﺗﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ [4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻟﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺭﺟﺎء ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻟﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺗﻙ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]ﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻬﻣﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺟﻝ ﻣﺭﺳﻭﻡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺧﻁﺎﻥ ﻣﺗﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ‬‫‪ 2006/66/EC‬ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ [2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬‫ﻟﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺭﺟﺎء ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻟﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺗﻙ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﻟﻠﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺑﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻹﻟﺯﺍﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺄﺛﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ‪.‬‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫‪THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE‬‬‫‪AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE‬‬‫‪PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE‬‬‫‪OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN‬‬‫‪COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC‬‬‫‪VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT‬‬‫‪WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED‬‬‫‪IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL‬‬‫‪ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A‬‬‫‪VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE‬‬‫‪AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR‬‬‫‪SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.‬‬‫‪ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED‬‬‫‪FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE‬‬‫‪HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪6‬‬‫)ﺟـ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻘﻭﻁ‪ ،‬ﺻﺩﻣﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺇﻟﺦ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺷﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬‫)ﺩ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪ ،‬ﺯﻟﺯﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﺭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺿﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﺎﻋﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻛﻭﺍﺭﺙ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻭﺙ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﻅﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫)ﻫـ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻹﻫﻣﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺗﺣﺕ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺣﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻔﺛﺎﻟﻳﻥ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺎﻗﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫)ﻭ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫)ﺯ( ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻁﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬‫ﻏﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﻭﺣﻳﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﻣﻘﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ .‬ﺗﺳﺗﺛﻧﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬‫ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺧﺳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻌﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻛﺑﺩﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻳﻝ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺧﻠﻝ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺭﺭ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ‬‫ﻷﻱ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻛﺳﺳﻭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺕ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺳﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ ‪ Windows‬ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ‬‫‪.Microsoft Corporation‬‬‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻫﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺩ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪Eye-Fi,‬‬‫‪.Inc‬‬‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ "ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻅﻝ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻧﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟّ ﻠﺔ ﺑﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺭﺍﻉ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ‪Apical‬‬‫‪.Limited‬‬‫‪،Micro Four Thirds، Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Micro Four Thirds‬ﻭ ‪Four‬‬‫‪ Thirds‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪OLYMPUS IMAGING Corporation‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺣﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ‬‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺑﺎﺭﺓ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻫﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi, Inc.‬‬‫ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪Wi-Fi CERTIFIED‬‬‫ﻫﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺻﺩﻳﻕ ﻟﺗﺣﺎﻟﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬‫‪.Alliance‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ‬‫"ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪ "DCF/‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻧﺹ‬‫ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﺻﻧﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬‫)‪.(JEITA‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺧﺹ ﻣﺎﻟﻛﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ‬‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺧﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬‫ﻳﻔﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻟﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺣﺎﺏ ﺭﺧﺻﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻡ‬‫ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻟﻳﻙ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﻭﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ‬‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺧﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻳﻐﺔ‬‫ﻣﻠﻑ ‪ PDF‬ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪http://www.olympus.co.jp/en/support/imsg/‬‬‫‪digicamera/download/notice/notice.cfm‬‬‫‪167 AR‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪2.0‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪AR 168‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫‪169‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪([[ Underwater‬‬‫‪169‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﻴﻦ )ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪([Focus BKT‬‬‫‪170‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء )ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪([Movie Settings‬‬‫‪170‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪IC‬‬‫‪171‬‬‫‪AF/MF R‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪[MF Clutch‬‬‫‪171‬‬‫‪Disp/8/PC U‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ]‪ [Expand LV Dyn. Range‬ﻭ]‪[Multi Function Settings‬‬‫‪172‬‬‫‪Movie Z‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ]‪[PCM Recorder K Link‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪ [nNoise Filter‬ﻭ]‪[nPicture Mode‬‬‫‪172‬‬‫‪Built-In EVF b‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪[S-OVF‬‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪173‬‬‫‪173‬‬‫‪) OI.Share‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪(2.6‬‬‫‪173‬‬‫‪) OLYMPUS Capture‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪(1.1‬‬‫‪173‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬‫‪174‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪3.0‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ )ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ(‬‫‪175‬‬‫‪Exp/p/ISO V‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪[P Spot Metering‬‬‫‪175‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪4.0‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ )ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪([Focus Stacking‬‬‫‪176‬‬‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ )ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪([Bleach Bypass‬‬‫‪176‬‬

‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪2.0‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ S-OVF‬ﻟﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪ .................................. S-OVF n 1‬ﺹ‪173 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪([[Underwater‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ [[Underwater‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ‪.(70 .‬‬‫[ ‪Underwater‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ‬‫ً‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪ [#+WB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪MENU‬‬‫]‪) [[Underwater‬ﺹ‪.(106 .‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ (X‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Off‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪169 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺳﻴﻦ )ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪([Focus BKT‬‬‫]‪) [Focus BKT‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ( ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﺲ )ﺹ‪.(90 .‬‬‫‪Focus BKT‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫]‪ ،[Set number of shots‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫]‪ ،[Set focus differential‬ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫]‪ .[# Charge Time‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤًﺎ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪[Set focus differential‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤًﺎ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺣﺮﺭﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Focus BKT‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set number of shots‬‬‫• ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1/20‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺃﺛﻼﺙ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪0 0 3‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Focus BKT‬‬‫‪Wide‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪Set number of shots‬‬‫‪Set focus differential‬‬‫‪#Charge Time‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪Narrow‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪#Charge Time‬‬‫‪30sec‬‬‫‪Select time between shutter‬‬‫‪release for flash recharge.‬‬‫‪This setting is not necessary‬‬‫‪when using an Olympus flash.‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء )ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪([Movie Settings‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪ [Movie Settings‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء )ﺹ‪.(89 .‬‬‫‪Movie Settings‬‬‫]‪ :[Movie Resolution‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Frame Rate‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺍﺯ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻊ ]‪ [4K‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪.[Movie Settings] < [Movie Resolution‬‬‫• ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻣﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ]‪ [4K‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪.OLYMPUS‬‬‫‪AR 170‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪IC‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪.IC‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ IC‬ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪ [Camera Rec. Volume‬ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪ [PCM Recorder K Link‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬‫‪ (Z‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ )ﺹ‪.(172 .‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫)‪MENU‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ OLYMPUS IC‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪LS-100‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ OLYMPUS IC‬ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ LS-100‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪ [Slate Tone‬ﻭ]‪ [Synchronized ]Rec.‬ﺿﻤﻦ ]‪ [PCM Recorder K Link‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [On‬ﻓﻲ‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪MENU‬‬‫‪ (Z‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ )ﺹ‪.(172 .‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ‪ LS-100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ‪ LS-100‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳُﻨﻬﻲ ‪ LS-100‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ً LS-100‬‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪AF/MF R‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪MENU‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪) (R‬ﺹ‪.(100 .‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪[MF Clutch‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪MF Clutch‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Inoperative‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ LS-100‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ LS-100‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ ،USB‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ .[PCM Recorder‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Auto‬ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [USB Mode‬ﺹ‪ (103 .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪136‬‬‫‪171 AR‬‬‫‪Disp/8/PC U‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪MENU‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪) (U‬ﺹ‪.(102 .‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ]‪ [Expand LV Dyn. Range‬ﻭ]‪[Multi Function Settings‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪Expand LV Dyn.‬‬‫‪Range‬‬‫‪Multi Function‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫]‪ [Expand LV Dyn. Range‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[S-OVF‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ S-OVF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪173‬‬‫―‬‫‪Movie Z‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ‪/‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪MENU‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪AR 172‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪) (Z‬ﺹ‪.(107 .‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ]‪[PCM Recorder K Link‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪PCM Recorder K‬‬‫‪Link‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫]‪ :[Camera Rec. Volume‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Inoperative‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ IC‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Slate Tone‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Synchronized ]Rec.‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‪/‬ﻳﻨﻬﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ IC‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ‪/‬ﺗﻨﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪171‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪ [nNoise Filter‬ﻭ]‪[nPicture Mode‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪nNoise Filter‬‬‫‪nPicture Mode‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪v‬‬
‫―‬
‫―‬

‫‪Built-In EVF b‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪MENU‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪) (b‬ﺹ‪.(109 .‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪[S-OVF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪S-OVF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻳﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [S-OVF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ‪ n‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ]‪.[S-OVF‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫―‬‫‪S-OVF‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻳﻤﺎﺛﻞ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬‫‪ n‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ]‪.[S-OVF‬‬‫• )‪ n (S-OVF‬ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[Multi Function‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪ [S-OVF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ )‪ iAuto (A‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺗﺼﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻨﻲ )‪ (ART‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )‪(SCN‬‬‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺼﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )‪.(n‬‬‫‪) OI.Share‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪(2.6‬‬‫‪ OI.Share‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 2.6‬ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪) OLYMPUS Capture‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪(1.1‬‬‫‪ OLYMPUS Capture‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 1.1‬ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ ،USB‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.OLYMPUS Capture‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫]‪) ([Button Function‬ﺹ‪.(66 .‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪173 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬.‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‬.[Myset] ‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬:1*.[Reset] ‫[ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬Full] ‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬:2*.[Reset] ‫[ ﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬Basic] ‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬:3*‫ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬K
3*

2*

1*

170





170
170
170
170




















‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬Off

FullHD
10fps
Off
99
5
0 sec

Time Lapse Settings
Movie
Movie
Resolution
Settings
Frame Rate
Focus BKT
Set number of shots
Set focus differential

W
j/Y/i
X
Bracketing#Charge Time‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬c
v

3*

2*

1*

‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬

171







OperativeColor Creator,
Magnify,rISO/oWB,rWB/oISO,
Image Aspect,
S-OVF‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬AF/MF R c
MF Clutch
Disp/8/PC U

172



Multi Function Settings‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬/‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‬v

12
Movie Z

172
172





172

173












Standard
Off
Operative Camera Rec. Volume
Off
Slate Tone
Off Synchronized ]Rec.
Off

nNoise Filter
nPicture Mode
PCM Recorder K
Link
Built-In EVF b
S-OVF

AR 174‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪3.0‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺯﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪.[Highlight & Shadow Control‬‬‫‪HighLight+2‬‬‫‪Shadow+2‬‬‫‪Exp/p/ISO V‬‬‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟـ ‪MENU) Custom Menu‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪[P Spot Metering‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪:(V‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪ P Spot Metering‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ]‪ ،[Spot Hilight] ،[Spot‬ﻭ ]‪ [Spot Shadow‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪v‬‬
‫―‬

‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬‫‪RESET‬‬‫‪Midtone‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪175 AR‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪4.0‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ )ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪([Focus Stacking‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪ [Focus Stacking‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﺹ‪.(170 .‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬‫‪) Focus BKT‬ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪ 8‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﻣﻦ‬‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪AR 176‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ‪8‬‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺃﺿﻴﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪ OLYMPUS‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬‫]‪.[Focus Stacking‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫‪Focus BKT‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫‪99‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪0 sec‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Focus Stacking‬‬‫‪Set number of shots‬‬‫‪Set focus differential‬‬‫‪#Charge Time‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ )ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪([Bleach Bypass‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ]‪ [Bleach Bypass‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ )ﺹ‪.(30 .‬‬‫‪Bleach Bypass‬‬‫‪I/II‬‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ "‪ ،"Bleach bypass‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳُﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﻮﺍﺭﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫"‪ "II‬ﻫﻮ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﻸﺻﻠﻲ )‪.(I‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬.AF Illuminat
100 .................(‫)ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬100 ،51 ...................................... AF Mode
105 ............................................. All >95 ........................................... Anti-Shock
40 ...............................................Art Fade
102 .......................................Art LV Mode30 ،23 ............................ (‫ )ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ART
103 ...........(‫ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬Auto Focus Sound
35 ......................... (‫ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬A

B
103 ........................................Backlit LCD
90 ................................. BKT (Bracketing)
90 ............................................Bracketing
37 ................................................... BULB
100 ...........................Bulb/Time Focusing
104 ............................. Bulb/Time Monitor
104 ................................ Bulb/Time Timer
101 ................................. Button Function

C
51 .................................................... C-AF
51 ............................................. C-AF+TR
85 .......................................... Card Setup
52 ....................................... Color Creator
106 .......................................Color Space104 ........................... Composite Settings
119 ................Connection to Smartphone
107 ............................. Copyright Settings
100 ............................. Custom Menu (c)D
101 ..................................... Dial Direction
101 ......................................Dial Function
88 ،67 .....................Digital Tele-converter
102 ................................... Displayed Grid
106 ........................................dpi Settings

E
106 .....................................Edit Filename
110 ..................... Electronic Zoom Speed

177 AR‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬141 .......................................# RC Mode99 ...................................................... W
99 .................................. c Menu Display
100 ...................................P Set Home100 ،49 ....................I (Face Priority AF)
101 ........................................... j H fps
101 ............................................ j L fps
102 ................................ G/Info Settings
102 ...........................K Control Settings
103 ...................................zPreview lock
105 ......................................Slow Limit #105 ......................................... .X-Sync #115 ،105 ....................................... w+F
106 ............................................... WB+#
109 ........................... Warning Level 8
67 ................................................ I/H
79 ...................................(‫ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬G
168 .........................(‫ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‬U
107 ............................................ n Mode
172 ....................................nNoise Filter
172 .................................nPicture Mode81 ..................................(‫ )ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬82 .................................... (‫ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬v
81 ...........................................(‫ )ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬0
106 ....................... W Keep Warm Color
96 ................................... (‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬R
105 .............................................. K Set
103 ....................................(‫ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬8
82 ..................................... (‫ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬R
99 .............................(‫ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬i80 .................................. (‫ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬m
101 ..................... j Image Stabilization
103 ................................................. 0
39 ،26 ،23......................... (A) iAUTO
141 .................... RC Mode (# RC Mode)A
106 ........................................ AdobeRGB
110 ............................................ AEL/AFL
104 .....................................AEL MeteringM
37 ..................................... (‫ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬M
99 ......... (Menu Display (c Menu Display
67 ....................................................... MF
111 ،100 ................................... MF Assist
136 ،51 ........................... (‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬MF
171 .......................................... MF Clutch
101 ............................Mode Dial Function
102 ....................................... Mode Guide
40 .........................................Movie Effect
41 ............................. Movie+Photo Mode
41 ........................... Movie Tele-converter
40 ............................................Multi Echo
172 ,103 .............. Multi Function Settings
42 ...............................................My Clips
86 ................................................... Myset

N
104 ........................................ Noise Filter
104 .................................... .Noise ReductO
173 ............................................ OI.Share
173 ........................... OLYMPUS Capture
40 .................................... One Shot EchoP
34 ......................................(‫ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬P
28 ............................................... Panning
29 ............................................ Panorama
171 ,107 ............... PCM Recorder K Link
103 ................................Peaking Settings
32 ...................................PHOTO STORY87 ،70 ................................. Picture Mode
102 ....................... Picture Mode Settings
105 ........................................ Pixel Count151 .................................... Pixel Mapping
103 ..................................... Preview Lock
127 ................................................... Print
106 ......................................... Priority Set

Q
106 ....................................... Quick Erase104 ............................................. EV Step
109 ................................... Exposure Shift109 ................................................ Eye-FiF
106 .......................................... File Name
99 ..............................................Firmware
103 ................................ Flicker reduction
170 .........................................Focus BKT
100 ........................................ Focus Ring
85 ............................ Format (Card setup)
100 ....................................... Full-time AF

H
101 ......................... Half Way Rls With IS
102 ................................................. HDMI
53 .....................................................HDR
52 ...................Highlight&Shadow Control
60 ..................................... High Res Shot
102 ............................ Histogram SettingsI
57 ...................................Image Stabilizer
102 ......... Info Settings (G/Info Settings)
104 ،54 .............................................. ISO
104 ............................................ISO-Auto
104 ..................................... ISO-Auto Set
104 ............................................ ISO Step

J
97 ............................................ JPEG EditK
94 .................................. .Keystone CompL
101 ................................ Lens I.S. Priority
109 ....................................... Level Adjust
114 ............................................Light Box
104 ............................................Live Bulb
104 ........................................... Live Time
37 ........................................... LIVE TIME
102 ................................. Live View Boost

AR 178‫‪R‬‬‫ﺍ‬‫‪61 .................................................... RAW‬‬‫‪96 .................................... RAW Data Edit‬‬‫‪106 ............................ RAW+JPEG Erase‬‬‫‪107 ............................. Recording Volume‬‬‫‪99 ............................................. Rec View‬‬‫‪101 ............................. Release Lag-Time‬‬‫‪86 ................................................... Reset‬‬‫‪100 ........................................ Reset Lens‬‬‫‪98 .......................................Reset Protect‬‬‫‪101 .................................. Rls Priority C/S‬‬‫ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪60 ..............................................‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ ﻭﺃﺑﻴﺾ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ‪70 .............................‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺤﺒﺐ ‪30 ..............................................‬‬‫ﺃﻣﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪82 ...............................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪78 .............................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪79 ،78 .....................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪81 ،78 ................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ ‪79 ..................................‬‬‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ‪44 .....................................‬‬‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ‪44 ....................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪14 .....................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪40 ............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪66 ..............................w‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪124 ..................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪79 .....................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪25 ...................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪100 ،49 ...................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪50 .................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪49 ....................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )‪136 ،51 ........................... (MF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪125 ..................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪23 ...................................................‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪40 ............................................‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪23 ..........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪170 ,89 ..................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪58 ........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺐ ‪38 .........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤ ّ‬‫ُﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪38 ................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‪37 .................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ‪37 ...........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺰﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ‬‫)‪37 ................................... (BULB/TIME‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪92 ..............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪67 ،26 .......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪77 ،52 ،22.................................. INFO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪122 ................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ‪13 .....................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪133 ..................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ‪19 ..................................‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪76 ............................................‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪19 ..........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪54 .....................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪58 .............................................‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫‪) S‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ(‪36 .................................‬‬‫‪51 .................................................... S-AF‬‬‫‪51 ............................................. S-AF+MF‬‬‫‪173 ................................................S-OVF‬‬‫‪) SCN‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ(‪28 ،23 .............................‬‬‫)‪100 ................Set Home (P Set Home‬‬‫‪105 ...................................Shading Comp‬‬‫‪103 ،17 ........................................... Sleep‬‬‫‪) Small Target‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ( ‪48 ........‬‬‫‪106 ................................................. sRGB‬‬‫‪) Super Spot AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪50 ..............................................‬‬‫‪T‬‬‫‪67 ..........................................Test Picture‬‬‫‪89 ............................... Time Lapse Movie‬‬‫‪109 .......................Touch Screen Settings‬‬‫‪112 ...................................................... TV‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪103 ......................................... USB Mode‬‬‫‪V‬‬‫‪102 ...........................................Video Out‬‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪105 ،55 ...............................................WB‬‬‫‪122 .................................... Wi-Fi Settings‬‬‫‪107 ....................... Wind Noise Reduction‬‬‫‪179 AR‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻊ )‪53 ......................(HDR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪81 ......................................................‬‬‫‪85 ........................................... All Erase‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ‪81 ...................................................‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ‪82 ...........................................‬‬‫ﺏ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪132 .............................................. SD‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪85 ....................................... SD‬‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ‪31 ...........................................‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪96 .....................................‬‬‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪98 ............................................‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ‪51 ......................................‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪51 ......................................‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪98 ،82 .....................................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪80 ....................................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪51 .....................................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪47 ..............................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪66 ...........................................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )‪34 .................................... (Ps‬‬‫ﺡ‬‫ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ > ‪129 .....................................‬‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪133 ............................................‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪61 .............................................‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪62 ......................................................‬‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪54 .............................................ISO‬‬‫ﺽ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪18 ................................. X‬‬‫ﻉ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ‪115 ،83 .....................................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪80 ...........................................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪115 ،83 ،79 .............................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪22 ...................................‬‬‫‪AR 180‬‬‫ﻑ‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺫﻭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪141 ........................‬‬‫‪107 ،74 ....................................... Movie R‬‬‫ﻕ‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪96 .......................................‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪99 ..............................................‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪85 ............................................‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪110 ،67 ،19 ............‬‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪113 ،45 ..............‬‬‫ﻡ‬‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪68 .................... Multi Function‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪30 .............................................‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪64 ..............................................‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪17 ...................................‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪67 ......................................................‬‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪121 .........................................‬‬‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪22 ...........................................‬‬‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪48 ..........................(P‬‬‫ﻥ‬‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪60 ...............................‬‬‫ﻭ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪51 .................‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪28 ..............................................‬‬

‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪2015.09.‬‬‫‪WC795803‬‬